Home

KX-TD500 Feature Guide V4M

1. No Leading Digitsto Number to Trunk Group No Digit delete be added 01 02 03 04 05 01 952 0 10 11 02 e 2 7 Trunk to Trunk Restriction PBX 3 e 8 2 TIE Routing Table PBX Code 953 No Leading Digitsto Number to Trunk Group No Digit delete be added 01 02 03 04 05 01 952 0 12 02 e 2 7 Trunk to Trunk Restriction PBX 4 e 8 2 TIE Routing Table PBX Code 954 No Leading Digitsto Number to Trunk Group No Digit delete be added 01 02 03 04 05 01 952 0 13 02 2 7 Trunk to Trunk Restriction Features Guide TIE Line Features Note e Ifyou want to restrict call relay from PBX 1 to PBX 2 via PBX 3 set TG11 to Yes at PBX 3 using Trunk to Trunk Restriction Programming Conditions None Programming Guide References e 2 7 Trunk to Trunk Restriction e 4 2 Trunk Line DID TIE Digits to delete DID TIE Number to be added e 8 2 TIE Routing Table PBX Code Features Guide References None Features Guide 381 TIE Line Features TIE Line Service Description 382 A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs which provides effective communications between company members at different locations TIE lines can be used to call through KX TD500 to reach another switching system PBX or CO By utilizing the TIE lines the KX TD500 can support not only communications with the public
2. co DSS PF Features to be assigned Button PT DSS PT DSS 2WAY REC Two Way Record Y v 2WAY TRAN Two Way Transfer Y v LCS Live Call Screening Vv Vv LCS Live Call Screening Cancel Vv v DAY NIGHT Day Night Switch v v Alarm Vv Answer v Vv v Release Vv v Vv Tone Through v Y Alert Vv YW indicates that the feature is available 1 x2 Conditions 312 Available for monitoring the call activity only Can only be assigned by User or System Programming Can only be assigned by System Programming Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT integration e g KX TVS100 Station Programming mode A PT in Station Programming mode is treated as a busy extension CO buttons and DSS buttons on a PT in Station Programming mode do not show the indication of call activity Flexible CO buttons Flexible CO buttons are provided on all types of PTs Features Guide General Features Programming Guide References e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key PF Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key PF Key Features Guide References 1 15 Proprietary Telephone Features DSS Console 1 16 Button Features e Buttons on Proprietary Telephones and DSS Consoles User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button
3. x x1 The button is provided without an LED The button is provided with an LED Light Emitting Diode The button is provided on the designated telephones DSS Consoles Shows the number of buttons only when multiple buttons are provided Buttons 7020 7030 7050 7055 7130 7220 7230 7235 7250 7420 7425 7431 7433 7436 7450 7320 7330 7335 SHIFT v v Viv Soft v v v v 3 3 3 3 SP PHONE W Vv v vVv v v v_ v vVv v v TRANSFER v v vV V v v ivV vv vVv v viv v vv VOICE CALL Y MUTE VOLUME v vV iv v Buttons on KX T DSS Consoles Buttons 7040 7240 7440 7441 Answer DSSHH v2 v2 v 66 v 48 PF v 16 v 16 Programmable Feature 2 3 RELEASE v The buttons which can be changed to function as a feature button are called flexible buttons The functions of the listed buttons on KX T Proprietary Telephones are described below AUTO ANSWER MUTE This dual function button is used for hands free answer back and microphone mute during a conversation AUTO DIAL STORE Used for System Speed Dialing and storing program changes CO Central Office line Used to make or receive an outside call This can be re assigned to a different CO or to various feature buttons Features Guide 319 General Features 320 CONF Conference Used to establish a 3 party 5 party conference call FLASH Used to disconnect the current call
4. If Modification Table 1 is applied the user dialed number 9 1 234 567 8910 is modified to 9 10333 1 234 567 8910 to access the least expensive Carrier E Similarly if Modification Table 2 is applied it is modified to 9 10555 1 234 567 8910 to access Carrier F Use the Digits to delete program when it is necessary to delete some leading digits from the extension user dialed number For example if the extension user manually dials a Carrier Access Code but the carrier is not the least expensive modification is required For example to delete 10333 from the beginning of the extension user dialed number and add 10555 enter 5 in the Digits to delete program Enter 10555 in the Number to be added program When 9 10333 1 234 567 8910 is dialed 9 10333 1 234 567 8910 The leading 5 digits except a line access code are deleted and 10555 is added 10555 1 234 567 8910 is sent to the CO line Note e X can be used as a wild card character which substitutes any digit in its position Example 1 Leading Digits 1800 gt ARS Plan 1 Leading Digits 1XXX gt ARS Plan 2 If the user dialed number is 1800 the system selects ARS Plan 1 Example 2 Leading Digits 1800 gt ARS Plan 1 Leading Digits 1X gt ARS Plan 2 If the user dialed number is 1800 the system selects ARS Plan 2 Features Guide 159 General Features Flow Chart of ARS procedures A long distance call is initiated
5. Calling extension Called extension COS OHCA Call Waiting setting assignment OFF ON 0 1 2 3 Disable BSS BSS BSS 2 2 Enable BSS OHCA sBSS Bo ss OHCA Off Hook Call Announcement is activated when the called extension is KX T7130 KX T7235 or KX T7436 2 Whisper OHCA is activated when both calling and called extensions are using one of the KX T 7400 series PTs e BSS OHCA and Whisper OHCA do not function if the other extension is a DN type PT 176 Features Guide General Features Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Call Waiting Set Cancel e 2 4 Class of Service COS Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA e 2 8 System Option Whisper OHCA to extensions other than T74XX Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Busy Station Signaling BSS e Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA 1 9 Answering Features e Call Waiting User Manual References e 4 3 17 Call Waiting e 4 3 50 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper Features Guide 177 General Features Operator Call Description To direct operator seeking incoming calls to the Operators one of the following ways can be used Intercom calls Extension users can call the Operator by dialing the feature number for Operator Call by dialing the FDN for Operator Group Outside calls To direct outside callers to the Operators set the FDN of an Operator Group as the
6. 2200220022022nesnnennnesnnennnnnnennnnennnensensnnennn 308 Volume Control Speaker Handset Receiver Headset Ringer u nu nee 309 1 16 Button Features sousonessessersnesnesnessersorsonsnnensenonsnnennesnensensensnnsnesnessansnnsnnennessessesnnenn 310 Button Direct Station Selection DSS uuusssnseessssnneesssnnennennnnennnnnnennnnnnennnnnne nenn 310 B tton Plexible u 4a rn ar rn san 311 Button Line ACCESS nn eninssk has vases outa sasavehasattvecaeavanetse 314 Buttons on Proprietary Telephones and DSS Consoles u 22022402220nneesnnesnenenneenn 318 LED Andic ation eisie daisies 2 20 een een Raila eee aaa 323 1 17 Display F atur es ccsiic ccetececscetsadsscesssesceceassces esssceces sdecettescscuseccsesesacssncesessucbesoeussveccerss 327 Absent Message Capability ccc ceceecceeeeseeescesseceseceeeeseeeeseeeaaecaecsseeeeseaeeeaeesaeeesaeens 327 Bilingtial Display 0s re ee reseed coat Sev i een aes 329 Busy Lamp Field saz ccgsceti an ein cement atte ETa a RES 330 Call Directory sis si2 s osetia e aes eee ae GS HR ee 331 Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb 2 22u2200ssesneesnnessnesnnesnnennnnnnnnnonsnnenenenennen 333 Call Loe Incoming c00 5 sista are iu 334 Call Eos OUZON aeri eieiaeo aee e cdepewencustebubecebs EEEE EEES 337 Display Contrast Adjustment ursu2sssesssensessesnnessnnennesnnnnnnennnennnesnnensnnensennsnnnnen nn 338 Display Call Informati
7. ccccccscceesceeeneeeeeteeeeaeceeaeeeeeeeees 176 Operator Calla 2uu 2 2m Ense ada aa gills Nos eae 178 PDN Gall een aa en Re a ag GU eden IS Se 180 Secret Busy Overniden 2 2n rear E E EE vie Cokie aes 181 TOM Restrict om iiitr rea rearen a a a aea aE aaa a a enia 183 Toll Restriction for Special Carrier Access uueueessnessnesnnesnnesnnnnnnnnnnnennnennennn ernennen 191 Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry eesseeeeeeresrereesrrerrrreeresresresrresees 192 Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing eee eseeesseeeseceseceeeeseeens 194 Trink Access iR Rai in na A a eaa 195 Trunk Connection Assignment Outgoing uuensersnnessenseenneesnnesnesnnennnennnennnennnen nn 199 Walking COS iea Bla n A tee eluedepease sve saws oa aa ae 200 Dialing Features unana aA EEA AR NT 202 Automatic Station Release ienna nn ea a Ea a N aa 202 Pulls One Touch Dialis ccc cave cssessstegt cate esse antike 203 One Touch Diahtt aere e den Biches a i ae eae 205 Pause Insertion Automatic eeesesesesesnsnsnsnsnnnnnenennnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnenensnsnnenenenenensnsnnnenn 207 Pickup Dialing Hot Line nnan a aa as 208 5 Table of Contents Quick Dialin oii eect terra ni Bus 210 Redi l leuten sdebbachisbhobecct elecesathuucetssticevengecewsncesct bac dawes le lectt EEAS 211 Station Speed Dialing i536 Arisa egia icy ee a a du ndscta dense as 213 System Speed Dialing 2 4 2 2 nee en kann 214 1 5 R ng
8. i PBX Code 951 Ext 1000 KIRARAK Inside of the TIE Line Network i Call Flow 1 Ext 1000 dials 77 951 9 or 801 through 848 TIE Line Access Code PBX Code CO Access Code 2 Ext 1000 may be required to enter a DISA TIE User Code depending on System Programming 3 Ext 1000 hears a dial tone from an idle CO line of PBX 2 4 Ext 1000 dials xxx xxxx phone number of the outside party Programming example To make up the TIE Line Network above the following System Programming is required at PBX 1 and 2 respectively PBX 1 8 2 TIE Routing Table PBX Code 950 No Leading Digitsto Number to Trunk Group No Digit delete be added 01 02 03 04 05 01 951 0 10 02 Step 2 is required when TIE to CO Security Mode is set to Yes at PBX 2 374 Features Guide TIE Line Features PBX 2 e 2 7 Trunk to Trunk Restriction e 4 2 Trunk Line TIE Line TIE to CO Security Mode e 8 2 TIE Routing Table PBX Code 951 No Leading Digitsto Number to Trunk Group No Digit delete be added 01 02 03 04 05 01 950 0 10 02 Conditions Trunk to Trunk Restriction Used to allow or restrict trunk to trunk path connection To permit the TIE caller to make a CO call via TD500 System the Trunk Group used for this purpose should be allowed to relay the call by System Programming e DISA TIE User
9. Point to MultiPoint P MP access mode If Multiple Directory Number MDN service is contracted with the Central Office up to eight extensions or terminals or both can be connected to one ISDN BRI line A different DN is assigned to each extension or terminal A call from ISDN is directed to a specific regular 350 Features Guide ISDN Features extension with DN or virtual extension with FDN directly after translation of the MDN number MDN Multiple Directory Number Configuration TD500 MDN on MDN line 1002 Ext 2000 1003 Ext 2001 MDN 1000 1001 gt 1004 Ext 2002 gt 1005 Ext 2003 Features Guide 351 ISDN Features Flow chart of required programs for ISDN BRI Select P P or P MP as Access Mode in program 1 2 Slot Assignment BRI Card Properties P MP P P PRI l Select MDN as Incoming Type in Select DDI as Incoming Type in program 4 2 Trunk Line program 4 2 Trunk Line MDN DID ISDN Is there a DID ISDN Bu Yes contract with the Central Office No i Assign Digit to receive DID DID TIE Digits to delete and DID TIE Number to be added according to the contract with the Central Office in program 4 2 Trunk Line Assign the DID MDN No and the Destination so that the DID MDN No can be directe
10. Group Type Description Terminate Ifthe called extension is busy Station Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle extension within the same Incoming Group By dialing the Floating Directory Number FDN the idle extension is searched in the order assigned in the Incoming Group always starting from the first assigned extension Station Hunting Group Terminate Ring All the extensions in the Ring Group ring simultaneously Operator Within an Operator Group an operator seeking call extension outside may come in on a single operator Single or all operators in the group simultaneously Multi depending on System Programming UCD Uniform Successive calls go to a different extension each time a call is received Extensions Call are hunted in a circular way Distribution DIL 1 N Used to group extensions or Extension Groups or both so that an incoming CO call comes in on multiple extensions simultaneously Conditions e Group Log in Log out Members of an Incoming Group except Group Type None can leave the group temporarily when they are away from their desks to prevent calls being sent to their extension Group Log out They can return to the group when they are ready to answer a call Group Log in e A single extension can be assigned to up to eight different Incoming Groups at a time e When one extension is assigned as DN and FDN Extension Group simultaneously in the Incoming G
11. Remote Station Feature Control Description Allows both the Manager and the Operators to set and cancel the following features for other extensions Remote Station Lock Control Used to lock other extensions so that no one can make an outside call or an intercom call except an operator call from those extensions Caller ID Log Lock Clear Used to clear the Caller ID Log Lock Code set by an extension user This is convenient when an extension user cannot remember his own lock code LCS Live Call Screening Password Clear Used to clear the password for LCS feature set by an extension user This is convenient when an extension user cannot remember his own password Remote DND Do Not Disturb Control Used to set or cancel Do Not Disturb feature for other extensions Timed Reminder Remote Used to set cancel and confirm the Timed Reminder feature for other extensions Remote FWD Call Forwarding Cancel Once Used to cancel the Call Forwarding feature set on an extension temporarily Switching COS Class of Service Used to assign either primary or secondary level of COS for each extension Conditions None Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Class of Service COS e Manager Extension 1 5 Attended Features e Caller ID Service 1 6 Originating Features e Electronic Station Lockout 1 8 Ringing Features e Do No
12. System Speed Dial TRS Level Override Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Toll Restriction 1 7 Dialing Features e System Speed Dialing User Manual References e 4 3 73 System Speed Dialing 194 Features Guide General Features Trunk Access Description There are the following four ways to access an idle CO line for making a call Type Description How to access Idle Selects an idle CO line automatically from Dial the feature number for the trunk groups assigned to the extension Local CO Line Access ARS default 9 Or press a Loop CO L CO Button lt PT only gt Direct Selects an idle CO line by pressing an idle Press an idle CO S CO G CO button directly CO L CO button lt PT only gt Individual Select the desired CO line without dialing Press a Single CO S CO Trunk the line access number button lt PT only gt Trunk Select an idle CO line from the desired trunk Dial the trunk group access Group group assigned to the extension number and a trunk group number Or press a Group CO G CO button lt PT only gt Conditions General e Class of Service COS programming COS programming determines the trunk group available for each extension user lt Section 2 4 Class of Service COS Trunk Group Setting in the Programming Guide gt e All PTs in the system have one L CO button by default e Flexible CO Button Assignment A flexible
13. Extension Group External Pager TAFAS Incoming Group Modem Remote Administration OGM Group DISA message Phantom Extension Other PBX extension Oe Call Flow Receives the DID number from ISDN Modifies the DID number according to DID Digit Modification Determines the destination DN or FDN according to DID Dial Registration 362 Features Guide ISDN Features Digits Modification Procedures The System modifies the DID number according to the following three parameters 1 Digit to receive DID The number of digits effective in the received DID number 2 Digits to delete The number of digits to be deleted from the beginning of the digits processed in Step 1 3 Number to be added The dials to be inserted at the beginning of the digits processed in Step 2 Example Digit to receive DID 4 digits Digits to delete 1 digit Number to be added 2 The System modifies the received DID number 4311 into 2311 as follows Processed in Step 2 4311 311 The first digit 4 was deleted This results in 311 Processed in Step 3 311 2311 The digit 2 was added to the beginning of 311 This results in 2311 DID Dial Registration The System converts the modified number into the destination DN or FDN according to this table Example The System searches for the number 2311 in the table When matching is found the call rings the corresponding extension or floating station
14. Hold Recall Tone Pattern Hold Recall Tone is emitted as follows 1 Outside Call Hold Recall Tone 1 s i 3 2 Intercom Call Hold Recall Tone ls e a Hold Alarm Tone Pattern If Call Waiting is enabled at the extension where the call is held an alarm tone is emitted as follows Features Guide General Features The display PT flashes the indication of the held party for five seconds at 15 second intervals synchronizing with the tone Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Call Waiting Set Cancel e 2 5 System Timer Hold Recall Time Features Guide References 1 10 Holding Features e Call Hold User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 289 General Features Ringing Tone Selection Description Allows the DPT user to select one of eight ringer frequencies for each line access button ICM CO DN This is useful to distinguish the type of incoming calls by ringing Conditions None Programming Guide References e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key Features Guide References 1 13 Audible Tone Features e Ringing Discriminating 1 16 Button Features e Button Line Access User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 2 2 13 Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons e 2 2 14 Ringing Tone Selection for INTERCOM Button 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 290 Features Guide General Featu
15. i Toll Restriction Check Not Restricted Is ARS Access Code 9 default dialed Yes No Are the leading digits found in an ARS Leading Digits Table a Call is not made Yes Call is routed via selected line ARS Override No Obtains applicable Routing Plan number from the ARS Leading Digits Table Call is routed via an idle line i Determines the Trunk Group of priority 1 in the ARS Routing Plan Table by the current time of day i priority 1 Is there any line available in the Trunk Group of Yes Obtains applicable Modification Table number for the Trunk Group from the ARS Routing Plan Table Modifies the digits i No Yes Is the Trunk Group of priority 2 assigned in the ARS Routing Plan Table Is there any line available in the Trunk Group of priority 2 if Calls Is the Trunk Group of priority 3 assigned in the ARS Routing Plan Table Yes Is there any line available in the Trunk Group of priority 3 Yes 160 Sends a busy tone The Trunk Groups of priority 4 to 16 will be checked in turn Features Guide General Features Conditions WARNING The software contained in ARS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognize n
16. 76 TIE Line Access 77 e 8 2 TIE Routing Table PBX Code 950 Features Guide 377 TIE Line Features No Leading Digitsto Number to Trunk Group No Digit delete be added 01 02 03 04 05 01 951 0 10 02 PBX 2 e 2 3 Numbering Plan 76 TIE Line Access 77 e 8 2 TIE Routing Table PBX Code 951 No Leading Digitsto Number to Trunk Group No Digit delete be added 01 02 03 04 05 01 950 0 10 02 Conditions None Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan TIE Line Access 2 7 Trunk to Trunk Restriction 4 2 Trunk Line DID TIE Digits to delete DID TIE Number to be added e 8 2 TIE Routing Table PBX Code Leading Digit Digits to delete Number to be added Trunk Group No e 9 2 DID Dial Registration DID MDN No 378 Features Guide TIE Line Features TIE Line Network Alternate Routing Description When more than two PBXs at different locations are interconnected with a network of TIE Lines your KX TD500 works as an intermediate switching office to other PBXs in the network by relaying TIE calls from one PBX to another A problem of telephone switching is that blocking sometimes occurs on the network and a call cannot be switched as required because all the lines on a given route are occupied or unavailable By utilizing this relay function several alternati
17. DID MDN No Destination Destination Name Max 16 digits Day Night Max 10 characters 2311 2000 3000 PANASONIC Conditions e What if the dialing digits received is not enough to decide the call destination If the number of digits received is less than the number which is programmed in Digit to receive DID reorder tone is sent to the caller or the call is redirected to the IRNA destination IRNA feature This is determined by System Programming e What if the call destination is busy If the destination of a DID call is in busy status the caller may hear a busy tone or the call is redirected to the IRNA destination or the call waits until the destination becomes idle This is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 18 Destination Busy DID in the Programming Guide gt Hardware Requirements To utilize this feature a BRI card KX TD50288 or a PRI23 card KX TD50290 is required e The tenant number and VPS trunk group number can be assigned in the DID table so that the system is shared with tenants on a DID No basis It is programmable whether to enable Features Guide 363 ISDN Features or disable the tenant assigned on a DID No basis by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option VM Trunk Service for DID in the Programming Guide gt e Tenant number is used to determine the time mode day night for the corresponding DID number VPS trunk group number is
18. 3 2 8 008 Absent Messages Set e 4 3 1 Absent Message Capability 328 Features Guide General Features Bilingual Display Description Provides the display PT user with either an English or French display Either display can be selected by Station or System Programming Conditions None Programming Guide References e 4 3 Extension Line Language Features Guide References None User Manual References e 2 2 1 Bilingual Display Selection e 6 1 1 Display Examples Features Guide 329 General Features Busy Lamp Field Description The LED Light Emitting Diode indicators of the DSS Direct Station Selection buttons each of which corresponds to a selected extension display whether the corresponding extensions are idle or busy Conditions DSS Button Assignment This function is available for DSS buttons on DSS Consoles and for flexible CO buttons assigned as DSS buttons on PTs Log in Log out DSS buttons reflect the Log in Log out status of the extensions in the Extension Group Incoming Group UCD as follows Off Log in Red slow flashing Log out e A DSS button indicator lights in red if the corresponding extension is busy Programming Guide References e 3 3 Extension Group UCD Setting LOGIN Monitor e 3 5 Incoming Group UCD Setting Supervisor Extension e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key Features Guide References 1 15 Propr
19. Call FWD to CO TIE in the Programming Guide gt determines the extension that can perform this feature Treatment of the forwarded call Toll Restriction Automatic Route Selection ARS and Account Code Entry requirements of the extension in Call Forwarding mode still apply to the call forwarded by this feature If you are storing an account code enter the account code and then the delimiter 99 before the line access code Extension to CO Line Call If a call between an extension and an outside party is established by this feature the call duration can be restricted depending on the setting ofthe system timer lt Section 2 5 System Timer Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time in the Programming Guide gt Co to CO Line Call If a call between two outside parties is established by this feature the call duration is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 5 System Timer CO to CO Line Call Duration Time in the Programming Guide gt An alarm tone is sent to both outside parties 15 seconds before the time out The call is disconnected at the time out Trunk to Trunk Connection Before utilizing this feature Trunk to Trunk Restriction should be enabled by System Programming You can store the telephone number up to 24 digits Valid digits are 0 through 9 X and PAUSE PAUSE can also be stored by dialing x No Answer to CO TIE Line The number of rings before the call is forwarded is programmable lt Sec
20. Conditions e Extension numbers and names are programmable If no extension name is stored only the extension number is displayed e Intercom Call Duration is not shown on the display e The outgoing CO call duration count starts when a specified time expires e Caller ID Service Depending on a type of the CO line Caller ID Service can be classified as follows 1 Analog CO line Caller ID Service 2 ISDN CO line CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation Service Features Guide 339 General Features 3 T1 CO line Caller ID Service Programming Guide References 2 5 System Timer Call Duration Count Start Time e 4 2 Trunk Line Name 4 3 Extension Line DN Name Initial Display Selection e 5 12 Caller ID Registration e 9 2 DID Dial Registration Name Features Guide References 1 5 Attended Features e Caller ID Service User Manual References e 4 5 3 Call Information Display KX T7436 KX T7433 KX T7235 KX T7230 only 340 Features Guide General Features Display Date and Time Description Allows the display PT users to display the following Date and Time Notation while on hook Display example Day of the week Month Day Time AM PM SAT JANO1 12 00A Conditions e The display PT users can alternate between Date and Time display and Self extension number display by pressing while on hook e The current date and time are set b
21. To make up the TIE Line Network above the following System Programming is required at PBX 1 and 2 respectively PBX 1 2 3 Numbering Plan 01 1st Hundred Block Extension 10 77 Other PBX 01 2 PBX 2 Ext 2000 Extension numbers 2000 2299 8 2 TIE Routing Table No Leading Digitsto Number to Trunk Group No Digit delete be added 01 02 03 04 05 01 2XX 0 10 376 Features Guide TIE Line Features PBX 2 e 2 3 Numbering Plan 01 1st Hundred Block Extension 20 77 Other PBX 01 1 e 8 2 TIE Routing Table No Leading Digitsto Number to Trunk Group No Digit delete be added 01 02 03 04 05 01 1XX 0 10 2 Location Number PBX code and Extension Number 1 Extension users can make a call to other extension users in other PBXs within a TIE Line Network by dialing a location number PBX Code and an extension number Each PBX in the same TIE Line Network can have its unique flexible extension numbering plan A Network of TIE Lines PBX 1 PBX 2 TIE Line PBX Code 950 PBX Code 951 Ext 1000 Ext 1000 Call Flow 1 Ext 1000 of PBX 1 dials 77 951 1000 2 Ext 1000 of PBX 1 is connected to Ext 1000 of PBX 2 Programming example To make up the TIE Line Network above the following System Programming is required at PBX 1 and 2 respectively PBX 1 e 2 3 Numbering Plan
22. e The jack with the lowest physical number of the DHLC DLC card must be connected to the VPS port with the lowest physical number Installation Manual References e 2 3 3 DOHCA Card e 2 4 6 DHLC Card KX TD50170 e 2 4 7 DLC Card KX TD50172 Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT integration e g KX TVS100 48 Features Guide General Features Programming Guide References e 1 2 Slot Assignment e 1 4 Extension Port Assignment Card No Attribute e 1 5 VPS DPT Port Assignment TVS No VPS Card Type Jack No Port No Ext No 1 DN Ext No 1 Group No Ext No 2 DN Ext No 2 Group No Status e 2 8 System Option Sending DID Number to VPS e 3 2 Trunk Group Intercept Destination Day Night e 3 3 Extension Group Group No FDN Tenant No Overflow Setting Destination Day Night Group Type e 4 2 Trunk Line Incoming Type Destination Day Night Lunch Break e 4 3 Extension Line Group No Mailbox No COS No Primary COS No Secondary Intercept Destination Day Night e 5 10 VPS Integration Turn off control of Message Waiting lamp Extension s mailbox number Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Automatic Configuration e Int
23. 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 240 Features Guide General Features Live Call Screening LCS Description This is one ofthe DPT Integration features Allows the PT user to monitor his voice mailbox while a caller is leaving a message in it The extension user can intercept the recording in order to talk with the caller The voice mailbox can be monitored in one of the following two ways Hands Free Mode When a caller starts to record a message the caller s voice is heard through the built in speaker of a PT automatically the extension user can talk to the caller by going off hook Private Mode When a caller starts to record a message a notification tone is emitted by the DPT The extension user can monitor the caller s voice by going off hook Notification Tone dls To intercept the call in either Hands Free or Private mode press the LCS button Conditions e Call Waiting If the extension user is busy on a call when a caller begins to leave a message a call waiting tone is sent if programmed beforehand The extension user can put the current call on hold before accessing LCS LCS button LCS Cancel button LCS LCS Cancel button can be assigned to a flexible CO DSS button by Station User or System Programming LCS Password Clear To prevent unauthorized monitoring a 3 digit password must be set by the extension user If the extension user forgets his password it can be cleared by t
24. 2 on TSW card Numbering Plan 10 Phantom Extension 11 Quick Dialing 12 Remote Administration 13 SMDR Station Message Detail Recording 14 System Administration Terminal 15 Toll Restriction Tables Resources which can be divided 1 Call Park Area Caller ID Registration Table Day Night Switching Mode Doorphone vs oo na Wu BR W N Account Code Extension Group External Pager OGM Outgoing Message Group Station Paging Group 10 System Speed Dialing 11 Trunk Group Features Guide 99 General Features Conditions e The following features do not work between extensions if they do not belong to the same tenant Call Forwarding Executive Busy Override Barge In Executive Busy Override Extension Privacy Release e These restrictions apply even if Inter tenant Calling lt Section 2 2 Tenant in the Programming Guide gt is enabled between two tenants Programming Guide References e 2 2 Tenant e 3 2 Trunk Group Tenant No e 3 3 Extension Group Tenant No e 3 4 Paging Group e 3 6 OGM Group Tenant No e 4 5 Doorphone Tenant No e 4 6 External Paging Tenant No e 5 2 System Speed Dialing Tenant No 5 6 Account Code Tenant No e 5 12 Caller ID Registration Tenant No Features Guide References None User Manual References Not applicable 100 Features Guide General Features
25. Dial Number Outgoing call shows the other party s telephone number Valid digits are O through 9 x P if PAUSE button is pressed or if a host PBX access code is entered Received call shows lt INCOMING gt If a Caller ID is assigned to the other party it shows lt I gt number or name Timed Reminder shows the detailed Timed Reminder information when the Timed Reminder starts and it is answered or not answered Login Logout lt For Extension Group Phantom Extension members gt shows the status of Login Logout lt For Incoming Group members gt shows the status of Group Login Logout by specifying an Incoming Group with FDN or all Incoming Groups with x 8 Ring shows the ring duration of the incoming call in Minutes Seconds 9 Duration shows the duration of the call in Hours Minutes Seconds 10 Acct code Account Code shows the account code appended to the call 11 CC Condition Code shows call handling type with the following codes TR Transfer FW Call Forwarding to Trunk DO Non Security Trunk Access by a DISA caller NN DISA User Code No NN 01 32 RM Remote access to a modem RC Received an incoming call AN Answered an incoming call NA Not answered an incoming call OR COS Override TO TIE line access Conditions e When programmed for outgoing toll calls only printing occurs only for calls which start with the numbers stored in any Denied Code Table from levels 2 to 6 In the ARS mode
26. Dial Tone 4 Busy Tone Ringback Tone 1 Ringback Tone 2 Do Not Disturb DND Tone CO to CO Line Call Limit Warning Tone 390 Features Guide Tone Patterns Hold Alarm Tone Call Waiting Tone 1 outside intercom Call Waiting Tone 2 outside Call Waiting Tone 2 intercom Outside Calls Outside Call Hold Recall Intercom Calls Intercom Hold Recall Doorphone Calls Timed Reminder Callback Ringing Camp on Recall Features Guide 391 Tone Ring Tone 392 Features Guide Index Section 5 Index Features Guide 393 Index A Absent Message Capability 327 Account Code Entry 16 Alternate Calling Ring Voice 153 ANSWER and RELEASE buttons Operation 227 Answering Features 227 Answering Direct Trunk 229 Attended Features 117 Audible Tone Features 284 Automatic Callback Busy Camp On 155 Automatic Calling Cancel 18 Automatic Configuration 19 Automatic Hold For Hold 243 Automatic Hold For Transfer 244 Automatic Route Selection ARS 156 Automatic Station Release 202 B Background Music BGM 296 Background Music BGM External 21 Bilingual Display 329 Busy Lamp Field 330 Busy Station Signaling BSS 163 Button Features 310 Button Direct Station Selection DSS 310 Button Flexible 311 Button Line Access 314 Buttons on Proprietary Telephones and DSS Con soles 318 C Call Directory 331 Call For
27. General Features 2 If the Ist call arrives at extension A a the 2nd call will arrive at extension B b the 2nd call will arrive at extension A a Search Mode UCD b Search Mode Sequential 3rd call in queue 3rd call in queue 2nd call in queue 2nd call in queue UCD group UCD group Extension B Extension A When extension A is busy or logged out the call arrives at extension B When extension B is busy or logged out the call arrives at extension C Extension B Extension C Extension A Extension C 3 When the 2nd call arrives at extension B the 3rd call will arrive at extension C Notes e Busy status If group members are in one of the following conditions they are considered as busy 1 The extension is in Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb FWD DND mode Calls toa UCD Group may ring the extension in FWD DND mode or skip it This is determined by System Programming lt Section 3 3 Extension Group 3 5 Incoming Group FWD DND Mode in the Programming Guide gt 2 Another call is already ringing on the extension 3 The extension is off hook 4 The extension is logged out Login Logout Group Login Logout Extension users in the UCD Group can leave the group temporarily when they are away from their desks to prevent calls being sent to their extensions Logout They can return to the group when they are ready to ans
28. IN Detection Detection Time Features Guide References None 22 Features Guide General Features User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 23 General Features Class of Service COS Description Used to define a set of services available to the extension user Up to 96 different types of Class of Service can be established by System Programming A Class of Service number is assigned to each extension by System Programming The programmable items are shown below Programmable items Selection Extension Account Code Mode Optional Verify Toll Verify All Automatic Hold Enable Disable Call Forwarding Follow Me Enable Disable Call Forwarding to CO TIE Enable Disable Call from TRS Toll Restriction Level 7 Enable Disable Digits Restriction in CO Talk Mode Unrestricted 1 15 digits DND Do Not Disturb Override Enable Disable Executive Busy Override Enable Disable Executive Busy Override Deny Enable Disable Incoming Group FWD Disable Own Group s Any Group Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Enable Disable Released Link Operation Enable Disable SDN COS Owner Extension PDN Secret Busy Override Enable Disable Switching Day Night Mode Enable Disable Time Limit of Outside Calls Yes No Transfer to CO Enable Disable Transfer to TIE Enable Disable Transferring CO dial tone e
29. Office such as Call Waiting etc This is performed by putting the current party on hold and sending a flash signal to the other end during an outside call Conditions FLASH Button Operation Pressing the FLASH button on a PT results in either sending Flash signal or disconnecting the current call This is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 3 FLASH button operation while CO talking and 4 FLASH button operation when Don t release the trunk is selected at 3 in the Programming Guide gt e Flash Time The flash time must be assigned as required by the Centrex host PBX or CO line e Memory Dialing During outside calls a FLASH stored in System Speed Dialing Station Speed Dialing or One Touch Dialing works as External Feature Access not as Flash Disconnect Signal used to disconnect the calls e lt PT gt FLASH button or the feature number is used to perform this feature e lt SLT gt Feature number is used to perform this feature This feature does not function if an SLT has a call on Consultation Hold Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan External Feature Access e 2 8 System Option FLASH button operation while CO talking FLASH button operation when Don t release the trunk is selected at 3 e 3 2 Trunk Group Flash Time Max Dial No after EFA Signal Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Host PBX Access 1 12 Conversation Features e F
30. cheeeahitseikegnansitesahitetenskehelinaifee 280 Privacy Automatic 224 22 Rai LEHREN gesonderten ent 281 P lse to Tone C nyersion 7u Rare tie ean inks 282 Two Way Recording into the Voice Mail 0 ce eecesecssecsseceeceeeeeneeeeecaecaeesaeenseeees 283 Features Guide Table of Contents 1 13 Audible Tone Features ssessersorsnssnessersorsnnennensensesnesnnesnennensnnsnesnensersarsansnnennennenannnn 284 Confirmation TOMES units teeiihstiedlesenulestnihunin 284 Dial Tones Distinchver anna aan EN nase a 286 Hold Ree ll 5 222 0 eat bean ne es 288 Ringing Tone Selection 2u 2 u 2 22 Beeren ne ne 290 Ringing Delayed rin ei n ernennen 291 Ringing Discriminating skeaten aoe ar nE eisen 292 1 14 Pagine Features nn aaan sodedsseateabascceanasbeSanazbeeeeas 293 Pagin2 teso erenan nen E A EEE A rn ayaa ckesete nee 293 1 15 Proprietary Telephone Features esossssesssssssnssnsssnnsssssnnnsnssnnssnssssnnsnsssnnsnsssnnnune 296 Backsround Musie BGM 4u8 ee esessleiseniellaikrutelnhnetehtesbriniseteialele 296 DSS Console Zen eal eee aes 298 Handset Microphone Mute cee eecesecsseeeecesseeseeeeseesaecseceeeseeesceeseeeeeaeesaeceaecneeseeeenes 301 Handset Headset Selection neinni ataia a a iee 302 Microphone Mute s oerien i aen EAA NE TAAA E a 303 Station Program Cleat reorit n oeer a r tn tii pantie 304 Station Programming nnn i mean BEER E ieee 306 Station Programming Data Default Set
31. e 4 2 Trunk Line Name e 4 3 Extension Line Initial Display Selection Call Log Incoming Overwrite Mode Call Log Incoming Lock Password e 5 11 Caller ID Modification Local Call Area Code Local Call Digits to delete Local Call Number to be added Long Distance Call Digits to delete Long Distance Call Number to be added e 5 12 Caller ID Registration e 10 4SMDR Print out Caller ID Information Features Guide References 1 17 Display Features e Call Log Incoming e Display Call Information User Manual References e 2 2 6 Initial Display Selection e 3 2 6 006 Caller ID Dial Set 3 2 7 007 Caller ID Name Set e 4 5 3 Call Information Display KX T7436 KX T7433 KX T7235 KX T7230 only e 4 5 4 Call Log Incoming KX T7436 KX T7433 KX T7235 KX T7230 only 118 Features Guide General Features Caller ID Service on T1 Line Description Provides the display PT user with a caller s information such as telephone number max 24 digits sent from the T1 Central Office over the CO line assigned to receive Caller ID service calls Conditions e A special arrangement is required with the telephone company to utilize the Caller ID Service e Caller ID Number and Name Registration Up to 1000 entries of number and name for Caller ID Service can be programmed either by User or System Programming e Tenant Service If Tenant Service is employed up to 2000 entri
32. e Conference 3 Party User Manual References e 4 3 11 Call Hold e 4 3 15 Call Splitting 248 Features Guide General Features Consultation Hold Description Allows an extension user to place a call on hold temporarily on purpose to transfer it to make a Conference call or to perform Call Splitting A PT user can place a call on Consultation Hold by pressing TRANSFER or CONF button An SLT user can place a call on Consultation Hold by pressing the switchhook lightly only to transfer it Conditions e The following calls cannot be placed on Consultation Hold Doorphone calls Paging e lt ICM type PT gt A new incoming call will not come in on the extension which has a call on Consultation Hold The extension is regarded as busy e Music on Hold When a call extension outside is placed on Consultation Hold Music on Hold is sent to the caller if available Hold Recall If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time Hold Recall starts e Automatic Disconnection If a call extension outside placed on consultation hold is not retrieved in 30 minutes it is disconnected automatically Programming Guide References e 2 5 System Timer Hold Recall Time e 2 8 System Option SLT On hook with consulting held call Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Music on Hold 1 10 Holding Features e Call Splitting 1 11 Transferring Features e Call Transfer Features Gui
33. e The UCD Time Table procedure applies to outside calls including transferred calls only e Any command after TR RET or Blank does not function e If any unavailable OGM S 1 8 is assigned in the UCD Time Table it will be ignored Features Guide 149 General Features Conditions e This feature must be enabled by System Programming for the desired UCD Group s e In addition each extension must enable regular Call Waiting feature lt Section 4 3 17 Call Waiting in the User Manual gt e UCD OGM To utilize OGM messages for UCD callers assign OGM Type to UCD OGM by System Programming lt Section 3 6 OGM Group OGM Type in the Programming Guide gt e Music on Hold or Ringback Tone It is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 1 Sound source during transfer in the Programming Guide gt whether to send a ringback tone or Music on Hold to the caller 150 Features Guide General Features Programming Guide References 1 4 Extension Port Assignment Group No 2 3 Numbering Plan Login Logout Group Login Logout UCD Monitor Mode 2 5 System Timer Intercept Time 2 8 System Option Sound source during transfer Empty Group 3 3 Extension Group FDN Tenant No Overflow Setting Destination Day Night Group Type FWD DND Mode Calls to Empty Group UCD Setting Time Table No UCD Setting FWD No Answer
34. eeeseisesessseiesesssisscseirsersrsrrsssserssstseseisrsseestssesctsces 244 EallHoldi 2 2 2 RE Dhetace hits thet baleaneh ited teadenetebraactesnelts 245 CallParkisi ticki 2 2 a a Kar an tata aon eee een ees eae eee eee 247 EallSphttmel aeense en era 248 Consultation Hold 2 2 u2areraee una San 249 T11 Transferring Features oorno nnana eaa aAA A Annaa Nea RERA ARNAS 251 Call Forwarding oroen a A a e ea a tea a E 251 Call Forwarding All Calls to an Incoming Group ursessnessensnnesnnensnennnnesnenn en 256 Gall Transfer 2 ernennen 258 Intercept Ro tins fos take ne ea ee en ie 261 One TouchTransfer eusesieisei e ee Ea EEE NAE AE EEE EERO 263 RinginsTr nsfer z 2 2 2 0 0n 0 lee aed ie EELEE EEE nett 265 1 12 Conversation Features seesersorsonennessessessesnnessensersnnsnnsnsenssnersansnnennensensensnesnesnessersnnnen 266 Conference 3 Partynan ee T E R E A a Eaa aiden its 266 Conference 3 Pally us esennschpenkheiieieieleniichHniettesunlshtnuehebanige 268 Conference Unattended rninn a a n n a aaant 270 Data Line Security a ee a a Bil ea 272 DoorphoneGalli erse mein a a a a a T a aa e See 273 End to End DTMF Signaling Tone Through eseseeeseresrreresrssrerresrrsresresreerssreres 274 External Feature ACCESS enneren ana ee a eerde ei 275 Pl ashi ess u Ba mt Bet IRRE ER 277 Hands free Operationens raien eT alanine ih eee me 278 Off Hook Monitor ne 2n 2 einen el 279 Priy cy Rel amp ase
35. feature does not work Conditions e DNs cannot be used for setting a feature such as Call Forwarding etc Installation Manual References e 2 5 3 DID Card KX T96182 e 2 5 4 T1 Digital Trunk Card KX T96187 e 2 5 6 BRI Card KX TD50288 e 2 5 7 PRI23 Card KX TD50290 e 2 6 1 DISA Card KX T96191 e 2 6 3 RMT Card KX T96196 e 2 6 4 ERMT Card KX TD50197 Features Guide 39 General Features Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Ist Hundred Block Extension 2nd Hundred Block Extension 3rd Hundred Block Extension 4th Hundred Block Extension 5th Hundred Block Extension 6th Hundred Block Extension 7th Hundred Block Extension 8th Hundred Block Extension 9th Hundred Block Extension 10th Hundred Block Extension 11th Hundred Block Extension 16th Hundred Block Extension e 3 3 Extension Group FDN e 3 5 Incoming Group FDN 3 6 OGM Group FDN e 4 6 External Paging FDN e 5 3 Phantom Extension FDN e 10 6 System Parameters Remote FDN Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Extension Group e Incoming Group 1 5 Attended Features e Direct Inward Dialing DID e Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS 2 3 ISDN Attended Features e Direct Inward Dialing DID User Manual References Not applicable 40 Features Guide General Features Host PBX Access Description The system may be in
36. independently e Call Park Recall If a parked call is not retrieved in a specific period of time Call Park Recall rings back the extension who parked the call e Automatic Disconnection If a parked call is not retrieved in 30 minutes it is automatically disconnected e Confirmation Tone A confirmation tone is sent to the extension user who retrieved the parked call Eliminating the tone is programmable lt Section 2 8 System Option 9 Confirmation tone for Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Answer Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve in the Programming Guide gt Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Call Park Call Park Retrieve e 2 5 System Timer Call Parking Recall Time e 2 8 System Option Confirmation tone for Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Answer Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve Features Guide References 1 12 Conversation Features e Conference 5 Party User Manual References e 4 3 12 Call Park e 4 3 22 Conference 5 Party Features Guide 247 General Features Call Splitting Description When there are two active calls on an extension an extension user can talk either one of them alternately Conditions This feature does not work for the following calls Doorphone call Paging Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References 1 10 Holding Features e Consultation Hold 1 12 Conversation Features
37. still ring at their extension e The extension user cannot leave the group log out if at least one call is coming in on the group e UCD Login Monitor lt For Extension Group members gt Login Logout status of the UCD Group members can be monitored by the extensions in the Features Guide General Features same UCD Group through Busy Lamp Field of the corresponding DSS button UCD Login Monitor is enabled or disabled by System Programming lt For Incoming Group members gt Login Logout status of the UCD Group members can be monitored by the extension specified as the Supervisor Extension through Busy Lamp Field of the corresponding DSS button e All Logout All extensions in the Extension Group or Incoming Group can be logged out This is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option Empty Group in the Programming Guide gt If this feature is disabled by System Programming the extension user cannot leave the group log out At least one extension must be logged in However this does not apply to Auto Logout of the UCD group extensions Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Login Logout Group Login Logout e 2 8 System Option Empty Group e 3 3 Extension Group UCD Setting LOGIN Monitor e 3 5 Incoming Group UCD Setting Supervisor Extension e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Extension Group e Incoming
38. 2 u u2 een ae a ar a a EL 84 Released Link Operation nee a a n een nenn 86 Remote Station Feature Control u uuerssesssessnessnnennnnsnessnnesnennnnnnnnnsnennnnnnnnennnensennsnnnnan en 87 Remote Station Lock Contrl cinei A AE 89 Secret Dialing un nen ea aerae a a aaa AAEE Nine 90 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR eeessesseeseerserseresresrssresrissesresrresesrisseeseses 91 System Data Def ult Seti 2 2u naar ei Ada 96 Features Guide Table of Contents 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 Features Guide ED Cartiers s aten ise see ER ane he RR ul 97 TEMANU SELVICS AEE EE EE AT 99 Lime Qut Varta Ble a 080 Ra a E a a SA a 101 Trunk B sy Out u ee an R ARE E E ae NS 104 Trunk Group 2 2 ee eee eine Ne eh Se eh eh ee 108 Trunk Route Control u 0 i eden a sean dded dane EE nl heated er EEE 110 Walkin Station ar Ri a ieee 111 Fault Recovery Diagnostics sseesessseosssessecsseosoossooesossooossosesosssossossssessessssesssessosssosso 112 rover Alan ne een err carer reer rere area denen leitende 112 Power Failure RE Start use nenn A E EE E A ES 115 Power Failure Transferinin esnie a e a a a ae eraen 116 Attended Features sus000s000nssnnesnnsnonssonssnnsnnunsnnssnnssnnsnonssnnssnnnsnnsnnnssnnssnnssonssnnnssnnsnne 117 Caller ID Service un 2 lebe ANAT tech oteuatvoualiees 117 Caller ID Service on Tl Line eearnannaneninen 119 Direct In Eines DI a 2 22 RD ANEN ense re sntelebeetsigerise 121 Dir
39. 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 2 2 10 Phantom Button Ringing On Off Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 61 Phantom Extension Features Guide 85 General Features Released Link Operation Description When Released Link Operation is enabled an extension user will be automatically released from a call extension outside after transferring it to the destination if the destination extension is idle This feature simplifies the transfer operation by eliminating the need for going on hook or pressing the RELEASE button after transferring the call This feature is convenient for extension users such as Operators who handle a large volume of calls Conditions e Class of Service Class of Service programming determines the extension that can perform this feature e Released Link Operation functions when transferring a call to the ordinary extensions or floating extensions extension group incoming group phantom extensions e If the destination party is busy Camp on Transfer is set by going on hook e The SLT extension user cannot establish a conference call if Released Link Operation is enabled by System Programming Programming Guide References 2 4 Class of Service COS Released Link Operation Features Guide References 1 11 Transferring Features e Call Transfer User Manual References e 4 3 67 Released Link Operation 86 Features Guide General Features
40. 3 43 Live Call Screening LCS e 4 4 4 Live Call Screening LCS Password Clear 242 Features Guide General Features 1 10 Holding Features Automatic Hold For Hold Description Allows the PT user engaged in a call extension or outside to answer an incoming call extension or outside or to get a new line for making a call without losing the current call with a simple operation Ifthis feature is enabled the current call will be placed on hold automatically without pressing the TRANSFER button when the PT user presses the CO or DN on which a call is coming in or Answer button or the PT user presses an idle CO or DN button to get a line for making a call Conditions e This feature can be enabled disabled on a system wide basis by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 26 Pressing CO DN Answer key operation in talking in the Programming Guide gt e If this feature is disabled pressing another button during the call disconnects it e Automatic Hold For Hold system wide basis and Automatic Hold For Transfer COS basis can be enabled disabled independently Programming Guide References e 2 8 System Option Pressing CO DN Answer key operation in talking e 2 4 Class of Service COS Automatic Hold Features Guide References 1 10 Holding Features e Automatic Hold For Transfer User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 243 General Features Automatic
41. 4 3 49 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Features Guide 175 General Features Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper Description This is a variation of the OHCA feature The difference is OHCA provides two way communication but Whisper OHCA provides one way from the calling extension to the called extension communication Conditions e Call Waiting Whisper OHCA is only effective when the called extension has set Call Waiting feature If not the caller will hear a reorder tone after dialing the extension number e Non KX T7400 cases Whisper OHCA is activated when both calling and called extensions are using the KX T7400 series PTs by default If either one of them is a non KX T7400 series PT OHCA when the called extension is an OHCA capable PT or BSS is activated However Whisper OHCA between two non KX T7400 series PTs can be enabled by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 32 Whisper OHCA to extensions other than T74 75XX gt e Enabling Feature for Any PT It is possible to enable the Whisper OHCA by any PT by System Programming But it may not work properly e g the OHCA may be heard by unintended parties Conference Trunk An idle conference trunk is required to perform this feature e BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA If an extension user dials 1 while hearing a busy tone BSS or OHCA or Whisper OHCA will be activated at the called extension This is determined by the following conditions
42. 6 denies codes stored in the TRS Deny Code Tables for Levels 2 through 5 except the codes stored in TRS Exception Code Tables for Levels 5 and 6 denies codes stored in the TRS Deny Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6 except the codes stored in TRS Exception Code Table for Level 6 allows intercom calls only Available only if COS Call From TRS Level 7 Extension is enabled allows operator calls only Features Guide General Features Example of Toll Restriction programming Here is an example to explain the procedures for Toll Restriction programming 1 Determining the application Determine the dialing numbers that should be denied for levels 2 through 6 Levels 1 7 and 8 are fixed and do not require programming Entry Example Level TRS Deny Code TRS Exception Code 2 O11 None 3 O11 None 976 1XXX976 4 O11 None 976 1XXX976 0 5 011 None 976 1XXX976 0 411 1XXX555 6 O11 911 976 1911 1XXX976 800 0 1800 411 1XXX555 1 X0 X1 Note X substitutes a digit 2 System Programming Please refer to Programming Guide a System Class of Service TRS Level Day Night Assign a toll restriction level to each Class of Service COS Entry Example COS Level Day Level Night 1 1 6 2 2 6 Features Guide 185 General Features cos Level Day Level Night 8 8 8 b Toll Rest
43. Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Features Guide 313 General Features Button Line Access Description Used to get a line for making answering a call Line Access Buttons are provided on PTs only They are categorized as follows Button Type Description Intercom ICM Used to make or receive intercom calls and to set or cancel various features Available for an ICM type PT only CO Single CO Used to get a specific CO line for making or receiving outside CO TIE S CO calls Group CO A group of CO lines Trunk Group can be assigned to a flexible CO button G CO as Group CO G CO Any incoming call from CO lines in the Trunk Group arrives at the G CO button To make an outside call the extension user can get an idle CO line in the trunk group simply by pressing the G CO button Loop CO All CO lines in the system or in a tenant if Tenant Service is utilized can L CO be assigned to a Flexible CO button as a Loop CO L CO button An incoming CO call on any CO line arrives at the L CO unless there are S CO or G CO buttons associated with the line or unless the L CO button is already in use The PT user can get an idle CO line simply by pressing the L CO button DN Primary Used to make or receive both intercom and outside CO TIE calls and to Directory set or cancel various features An extension which has at least one PDN Number PDN button is calle
44. Automatic Route Selection 2 3 Numbering Plan Local CO Line Access ARS 2 8 System Option ARS Call Timeout Mode 7 2 Time Table 7 3 Leading Digits Table 7 4 Routing Plan 7 5 Digits Modification Table Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Trunk Access Features Guide 161 General Features User Manual References e 4 3 54 Outward Dialing Trunk Access 162 Features Guide General Features Busy Station Signaling BSS Description Used to prompt a busy extension ringing or engaged in a call to answer a new incoming call When BSS is activated by the calling extension a call waiting tone is generated at the busy extension to inform that another call is waiting Conditions e BSS feature functions if the other busy extension is an ICM type PT in the following status 1 The extension is off hook 2 ICM button is idle 3 Call Waiting is enabled e BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA If an extension user dials 1 while hearing a busy tone BSS or OHCA or Whisper OHCA may be activated at the called extension This is determined by the following conditions Calling extension Called extension Call Waiting setting COS OHCA j OFF ON assignment 0 1 2 3 Disable BSS BSS BSS W OHCA Enable BSS OHCA sBSS _ OHCA BSS OHCA Off Hook Call Announcement is activated when the called extension is KX T7130 KX T7235 or KX T7436 2 Whisper OHCA i
45. Button Assignment e 4 3 38 Full One Touch Dialing e 4 3 52 One Touch Dialing e 4 3 66 Redial 204 Features Guide General Features One Touch Dialing Description One Touch Dialing offers the PT user One Touch access to a desired party or system feature by storing an extension number telephone number account code or a feature number up to 24 digits in a One Touch Dialing button The number of buttons available depends on the type of PT One Touch Dialing buttons can be programmed to flexible buttons CO DSS or PF Programmable Feature Conditions e Combination dialing Speed Dialing One Touch Dialing manual dialing Last Number Redial and Saved Number Redial can be used together in a combination Storing more than 25 digits It is possible to store a number consisting of 25 digits or more by dividing it and storing it in two One Touch Dialing buttons In this case a CO line access code should be stored in the first button e Full One Touch Dialing If Full One Touch Dialing is enabled press the One Touch Dialing button directly without going off hook e To store the telephone number of an outside party a line access code default 9 or 801 through 848 must be stored as the leading digit e Any feature number can be stored in a One Touch Dialing button However the feature numbers for Speed Dialing Station and Speed Dialing Station Programming do not function Programming Guide References e 4 3
46. CO button can be assigned as an S CO G CO or L CO button by Station User or System Programming as follows Button Type Assignable parameters Single CO S CO A specific outside line is assigned Group CO G CO A trunk group is assigned Loop CO L CO All outside lines are assigned Features Guide 195 General Features 196 After dialing the feature number or pressing the CO button the extension user will hear one of the following tones Dial tone Indicates that an idle CO line is seized XXXKX is shown on the display xxxxx trunk group physical number Busy tone Indicates that the selected CO line is busy CO in use is shown on the display Reorder Tone 1 Indicates that the CO line the extension user has attempted to access is not assigned CO Not Assigned is shown on the display 2 Indicates that access to CO line is denied Restricted is shown on the display Restricted may show on the display for the following reasons The extension has been locked by the owner Electronic Station Lockout or the Operator Manager Remote Station Lock Control The extension is restricted by the account code mode Verified All Calls or Verified Toll Restriction Override Account Code Entry The extension is restricted from making toll calls Toll Restrictions The same CO line can be assigned to
47. Call Pickup Deny Set Cancel 720 44 Data Line Security Set Cancel 730 45 Call Waiting Set Cancel 731 46 Executive Busy Override Deny Set Cancel 733 47 Pickup Dialing Program Set Cancel 74 48 Absent Message Set Cancel 750 49 Timed Reminder Confirm Set Cancel 761 50 Station Lock Set Cancel 762 51 Night Mode Set Cancel 78 52 Parallel telephone mode 39 53 External BGM On Off 35 54 Live Call Screening 799 55 Call Log Incoming Overwrite Mode 56 56 Call Log Incoming Log Lock 57 57 Timed Reminder Remote 7 Features Guide 35 General Features Flexible Feature Numbers Number Feature Default 58 Login Logout 45 59 Automatic Callback Busy Cancel 46 60 Walking COS 47 61 MODEM Control 791 62 Reserved 63 70 Quick dial 1 8 Blank 71 Reserved 72 Remote DND 722 73 Remote FWD Cancel Once 123 74 Trunk Route Control 724 75 UCD Monitor Mode 725 76 TIE Line Access 77 77 92 Other PBX 01 16 Blank 93 Paging Deny Set Cancel 721 94 Trunk Busy out 726 95 Walking Station 727 96 CLIP 711 97 CLIR 59 98 Reserved 99 Dial Information CTI Blank 100 COS Primary 792 101 COS Secondary 793 102 Reserved 103 Group Login Logout 48 104 Group FWD 714 105 120 Reserved Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Proc
48. Conditions IRNA of DIL 1 N calls If a DIL 1 N call an outside call which comes in on multiple extensions simultaneously is not answered within a specified period of time the system redirects the call to the pre determined covering extension If a VM extension is assigned as the covering extension the VM port automatically starts the AA Automated Attendant service of the VPS Mailbox Number The extension user s extension number is assigned as the mailbox number by default lt Section 4 3 Extension Line Mailbox No in the Programming Guide gt Mailbox number can be changed by System Programming lt Section 5 10 VPS Integration Extension s mailbox number in the Programming Guide gt Voice Mail Transfer Pressing the Voice Mail Transfer button and dialing the extension number allows the extension user to transfer the call to the corresponding mailbox In this case Follow on ID function is available Voice Mail Transfer button This button can be assigned to a flexible CO DSS button by Station User or System Programming Data Line Security The Voice Mail extension should be set to Data Line Security to achieve proper recording Busy Station Signaling The Voice Mail extension can execute the Busy Station Signaling BSS function to the busy extension Turn off Control of Message Waiting Lamp Used to determine whether the System turns off the Message Waiting lamp or the VPS does when the VPS answers the callback fr
49. Direct In Line DIL 1 1 Direct Inward System Access DISA TIE Intercom calls Calls ringing on a single extension e Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone dial tone 2 after going off hook depending on System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 15 Special dial tone after setting feature in the Programming Guide gt e An extension user in Call Pickup Deny mode can pick up calls ringing at another extension Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan CO Call Pickup Group Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup Dial Call Pickup Deny Set Cancel e 2 8 System Option Confirmation tone for Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Answer Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve Special dial tone after setting feature e 3 3 Extension Group e 4 3 Extension Line Call Pickup Deny Features Guide 231 General Features Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Extension Group User Manual References e 4 3 13 Call Pickup e 4 3 17 Call Waiting e 4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu e 4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features System Feature Access Menu 232 Features Guide General Features Call Waiting Description Used to inform a busy extension that another call is waiting The busy extension can answer the second c
50. ER DTR ER DTR e An AT Command for initialization enabling Automatic Answer etc can only be programmed by Serial Interface remote programming software AT amp FOQOEOVISO 1X0 amp D0 is stored as the default value e For more information about the AT Command please refer to the modem instructions Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan MODEM Control e 10 2 External Modem 1 2 Manual Initialization Command 1 5 Automatic Initialization Command e 10 3 External Modem 2 2 Connection Message 1 5 Disconnection Message 1 5 10 6 System Parameters Features Guide References 1 2 System Administration e System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer User Manual References e 4 3 36 External Modem Control Features Guide 33 General Features Flexible Numbering Description The numbers used for the access codes of system features and the numbers used for extension numbers are not fixed They can be set as required provided there are no conflicts Feature numbers can be from 1 to 4 digits utilizing numbers 0 through 9 as well as x and Extension numbers can be 3 to 4 digits in length Numbers 0 through 9 can be set as the leading 1 or 2 digits of the extension number If 1 digit is assigned as the leading digit extension numbers are 3 digit in length If 2 digits are assigned as the leading digits extension numbers are 4 digit in length
51. Extension Line CO Key PF Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key PF Key Features Guide References 1 7 Dialing Features e Full One Touch Dialing Features Guide 205 General Features User Manual References 206 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment 2 2 4 Full One Touch Dialing Assignment 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 4 3 52 One Touch Dialing 5 2 13 One Touch Dialing Button Assignment 5 2 14 One Touch Access Assignment for System Features 5 2 23 One Touch Dialing 5 2 24 One Touch Access for System Features Features Guide General Features Pause Insertion Automatic Description Used to insert a pre assigned pausing time between the access code CO line host PBX Centrex Special Carrier and dialed digits Conditions e This feature requires previous programming of the access code CO line host PBX Centrex Special Carrier as well as assignment of the pause duration e This feature applies to This feature works for Speed Dialing One Touch Dialing Last Number Redial Saved Number Redial Pickup Dialing and Call Forwarding to Trunk e Pause time Manual Pressing the PAUSE button in dialing number inserts a pause for a pre assigned time Programming Guide References e 3 2 Trunk Group Pause Time PBX Access Code e 5 7 Special Carrier Code Code Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Host PBX Access 1 6 Originating Features e Toll R
52. Guide References e 1 4 Extension Port Assignment Group No e 2 3 Numbering Plan Login Logout Group Login Logout 3 3 Extension Group FDN Tenant No Group Type e 3 5 Incoming Group FDN Group Type e 4 2 Trunk Line Destination Day Night Lunch Break e 4 3 Extension Line Group No e 4 7 ISDN Extension Line End Day Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Extension Group e Incoming Group e Floating Station User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 135 General Features Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS Description A tone signal is emitted from the external pager when an incoming CO call is received Any extension user can answer the call Conditions e Hardware Requirements A user supplied external paging device is required to utilize this feature Up to two external pagers can be installed in the system e To answer an incoming CO call ringing at an external pager dial the feature number and TAFAS number 1 or 2 The feature number is the same as that used to answer Paging External e TAFAS can be used in the following cases a The FDN of an external pager is assigned as the Destination of a trunk line DIL 1 1 In this case all incoming calls on the specified line will be signaled b A DISA caller dials the FDN of an external pager c The FDN of an external pager is assigned as the Intercept Routing destination
53. Hold For Transfer Description Allows the PT user to transfer the call intercom outside to the destination party with a simple operation without first pressing the TRANSFER button If this feature is enabled the current call is placed on consultation hold automatically when the PT user presses an idle CO DN DSS or Phantom button for transferring purpose This feature applies to the following buttons and operation DSS S CO G CO L CO PDN SDN Phantom direct dial One Touch Transfer When the PT user presses a DSS or Phantom button the call will be transferred to the extension associated with the pressed DSS or Phantom button immediately Please refer to One Touch Transfer of Section 1 11 Transferring Features for further information This feature is convenient for extension users such as Operators who handle a large volume of calls Conditions e Class of Service COS programming COS programming lt Section 2 4 Class of Service COS Automatic Hold in the Programming Guide gt determines the extension that can perform this feature e If this feature is not allowed by COS programming the current call will be disconnected by pressing an idle button or dialing the extension number during a call e The PT user can talk to the party on hold again by pressing the button associated with the call e Automatic Hold For Hold system wide basis and Automatic Hold For Transfer COS basis can be enabled disabled ind
54. Lunch Break mode by dialing the feature number or pressing the Day Night button Lighting Patterns of the Day Night button The light patterns of the Day Night button are as follows Mode CO button DSS button DSS button KX T7440 KX T7441 Others Day Off Off Off Night Red ON Red ON Red ON Lunch Green ON Green ON Off Break Green slow flash Green slow flash Off Conditions e Class of Service COS programming COS programming lt Section 2 4 Class of Service COS Switching Day Night Mode in the Programming Guide gt determines the extensions that can perform this feature Day Night button Day Night button can be assigned to a flexible CO DSS button by Station User or System Programming 70 Features Guide General Features e The following programming items may be assigned in a different way between day mode and night mode 2 2 Tenant Alert Extension Day Night 2 4 Class of Service COS TRS Level Day Night 2 4 1 Trunk Group Setting Trunk Group No 01 48 Day Night 3 2 Trunk Group Intercept Destination Day Night 3 3 Extension Group Overflow Setting Destination Day Night 3 5 Incoming Group Overflow Setting Destination Day Night 4 2 Trunk Line Destination Day Night Lunch Break 4 3 Extension Line Intercept Destination Day Night 4 5 Doorphone Destina
55. No Answer Time the call is transferred to the next idle member extension or the call continues to ring on the current destination extension This is determined by System Programming lt Section 3 3 Extension Group 3 5 Incoming Group FWD No Answer in the Programming Guide gt Auto Logout A member extension may be logged out automatically if it does not answer the call for pre determined times 1 10 consecutively This is determined by System Programming lt Section 3 3 Extension Group 3 5 Incoming Group Auto Logout Mode in the Programming Guide gt PT To use this feature correctly program Login Logout Group Login Logout button After the system activates Auto Logout press Login Logout Group Login Logout button in the off hook status to go back to the Login mode Any telephone After the system activates Auto Logout enter the feature number for Login Group Login in the off hook status to go back to the Login mode 141 General Features UCD Call Waiting This feature is different from regular Call Waiting This feature if enabled allows UCD group members to hear a Call Waiting tone when an outside inside call arrives but all the extensions in the UCD Group are busy However if a single extension belongs to multiple different Incoming Groups and there are calls in the waiting queue in one of the Incoming Groups the Call Waiting tone is generated at the busy extensions The tone stops only when
56. RAM battery alarm 1 A ERR AC DOWN AC power down 2 B ERR xyy CRD ERR Option Card failure 2 A ERR xyy DISCNCT Card disconnect 2 B ERR xyy DTR AIS Digital trunk AIS reception 2 1 ERR xyy DTR FRM Digital trunk frame failure 2 Dp ERR xyy DTR RAI Digital trunk RAI reception 2 D ERR xyy DTR SYC Digital trunk out of 2 D synchronization ERR xyy LPR RAM Option Card RAM failure 2 A ERR xyy LPR ROM Option Card ROM failure 2 A ERR xyyz MODEM Modem failure 2 A 112 Features Guide General Features Error Message List Priority order Error Message Description Priority Alarm LED ERR xyy OGM LOS DISA OGM is lost 2 C ERR xyy OPX POW OPX power failure 2 C ERR SMDR Printer is not connected 2 B ERR xyy DSP1LNK DSP 1 link failure 2 D ERR xyy CD FLT Card status fault 2 A Regarding the T1 card please refer to Reference Guide for T1 Digital Trunk card Legend Error Message x Shelf Number 1 3 yy Slot Number 01 14 Z Error Number Priority 1 Major Error 2 Minor Error Alarm LED When a problem occurs LED on PT Top Shelf Card OFF ON LED on PT Top Shel OFF ON LED on PT 22 2 OFF gt ON LED on PT Card OFF gt ON Do ee The Alarm light turns red automatically The corresponding error message is shown on the display PT if it is idle by pressing the
57. The extensions are searched in the order from lower to higher of the extension port physical numbers Installing additional cards may change the order until an idle one is found Station Hunting Group Circular Ring All the extensions in the Ring Group ring simultaneously Operator Within an Operator Group an operator seeking call extension outside may come in on a single operator Single or all operators in the group simultaneously Multi depending on System Programming VM Voice Mail All the VM ports are searched until an idle one is found to permit VM Service AA Automated All the AA ports are searched until an idle one is found to permit AA Service Attendant UCD Uniform Successive calls go to a different extension each time a call is received Extensions Call are hunted in a circular way Distribution Conditions Log in Log out Members of an Extension Group except Group Type None can leave the group temporarily when they are away from their desks to prevent calls being sent to their extension Log out They can return to the group when they are ready to answer a call Log in e A single extension user cannot belong to two or more different Extension Groups at a time Features Guide 29 General Features Programming Guide References e 1 4 Extension Port Assignment Group No e 2 3 Numbering Plan Login Logout e 3 3 Extension Group Group No FDN Tenant No O
58. This is one ofthe VPS Integration features The Automated Attendant AA Service provided by the VPS answers incoming calls and then routes the caller to the desired extension automatically If AA Service Integration is enabled the KX TD500 System transmits the Call Status Code busy answered ringing disconnected etc to an AA extension before sending the normal call progress tones These codes enable the VPS to immediately recognize the current status of the call and improve its call handling performance To utilize the AA Service Integration group multiple AA extensions together as an Extension Group and assign the group type of it as AA Within an AA Group an incoming call hunts for an idle AA extension in a circular way This ensures that callers who need the AA service can surely access it Upto 128 AA Groups each consisting of more than one extension in the same tenant can be created in the system By default Extension Group 127 is assigned as AA Group Automated Attendant AA Service An AA extension answers incoming calls extension outside and then transfers the caller to the desired extension automatically Outside Call DIL 1 1 DISA DID DDI ISDN TIE System VPS Extension Ba AAI gt AA2 Extension Group ee AA X AA 3 Integration Code Call Status Code Table Code Call Status Sent to th
59. Time Out Variable Description Provides timers to control various features or functions The following timers are programmable System Data Range Hold Recall Time 0 240 s Transfer Recall Time 0 48 rings Pickup Dial Waiting Time 0 5 s Call Duration Count Start Time 0 60 s First Digit Time 5 120 s Inter digit Time 1 30 s Intercept Time 1 48 rings Call Forwarding No Answer Time 1 12 rings Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time 1 64 min CO to CO Line Call Duration Time 1 64 min Door Opener Timer 0 10 s Timed Reminder Ringing Time 30 240 s Call Parking Recall Time 0 1800 s TIE Inter digit Time 3 30 s DISA Prolong Time 0 7 min DISA Delayed Answer Time 0 6 rings Timed Reminder Arrive Count 1 5 times DISA Automated Attendant Time 1 5 s DISA IRNA Time 5 240 s Intercept Time after OGM 0 55 Auto Shut off Time 3 5s Timed Reminder Arrive Wait Time 20 240 s PRI Inter digit Timer 1 1 30 s PRI Inter digit Timer 2 1 30 s Dial counter for PRI Inter digit Timer 2 0 24 digits Features Guide 101 General Features Trunk Group Data Range Disconnecting Time 0 5 1 5 2 0 4 0 12 0s Pause Time 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5s Flash Time None 80 300 600 900 1200 ms Pause Time before Flash Signal None 512 1024 1536 2048 ms Extension Group Data Range Overflow Setting Timer for Operator None 5 180
60. Trunk Busy out On The actual behavior of the PBX is as follows 1 Idle status a When the PBX user makes a call The trunk line is recognized as busy and making a CO call is disabled b When the outside caller makes a call and then the Central Office gives the incoming call to PBX The Central Office recognizes the PBX as idle and the call is processed The outside caller hears a ringback tone However even though the PBX receives the bell signal from the Central Office the PBX ignores it 2 Busy status the status of grabbing a CO line during a conversation a When the PBX user makes a call The trunk line is recognized as busy and making a CO call is disabled b When the outside caller makes a call and then the Central Office gives the incoming call to PBX The Central Office recognizes the PBX as busy and the caller hears a busy tone Notes e The default of each card is Idle If it were busy there is a possibility that the Central Office will mistakenly believe that there is something wrong with the trunk line e Ti standard does not have Busy out Status Block Therefore the default of all interfaces Loop Start CO Ground Start CO DID TIE is regarded as idle status 104 Features Guide General Features The Specification of Trunk Busy out On Card Type The status of Trunk Busy out set to On Note LCOT Idle status Busy status the Default status of Loop OFF grabbin
61. a new call is selected then the system will disconnect the current call and prepare for a new call Otherwise the X will be transmitted down the line to the other party Intercept Routing The Floating Number of a DISA OGM Group may be selected as the destination of Intercept Routing What if the destination is busy If the destination has enabled Call Waiting then he will hear the Call Waiting tone Otherwise the caller may hear a busy tone or the call is redirected to the IRNA destination This is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 17 Destination Busy DISA in the Programming Guide gt What if an illegal number is dialed The caller may hear a reorder tone or the call is redirected to the IRNA destination This is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 21 Ilegal Number DISA in the Programming Guide gt How many times does the IRNA destination ring This is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 5 System Timer Call Forwarding No Answer Time in the Programming Guide gt When all resources on the DISA card are busy a maximum of 12 calls are put in waiting status until DISA IRNA Time expires If the DISA resource remains busy the call is redirected to the IRNA destination If the IRNA destination is not programmed the call waits until the DISA resource becomes idle If the 13th or later call comes in on the DISA resource it is redirected to the IRNA desti
62. addressed individually with Multiple Directory Number MDN The MDN consists of the ISDN extension number and an additional digit 0 through 9 If MDN is not assigned all equipment on the same SO bus are called simultaneously The following bearer capabilities can be supported Transfer Mode Transfer Capability Circuit Unrestricted digital Circuit Speech Circuit 3 1 KHz Audio The functions of Terminal Equipment are similar to Single Line Telephone functions except for the following features 354 Absent Message Alternate Calling Ring Voice Automatic Callback Busy Call Forwarding Call Hold Call Hold Retrieve Call Log Incoming Log Lock Call Park Call Pickup Call Transfer Call Waiting Caller ID Conference three party five party Data Line Security DIL 1 N Service Do Not Disturb DND Do Not Disturb DND Override Extension Group Incoming Group Service Hunting Operator Ring UCD External Feature Access EFA Extra Device Port Log In Log Out Manager Extension Message Waiting Paging Group Answer Phantom Extension Paralleled Telephone Pickup Dialing Released Link Operation Remote Station Lock Timed Reminder Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS Voice Mail Service Walking COS Features Guide ISDN Features e Doorphone e Walking Station e Executive Busy Override Conditions e COS Class of Service for ISDN extension port applies to all Terminal Equipment on
63. an S CO button and a G CO button The same trunk group can be assigned to more than one G CO button Each PT can have more than one L CO button Ringing Tone Selection The Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT users can choose a desired ringing frequency for each S CO G CO or L CO button lt Section 2 2 13 Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons in the User Manual gt Idle Line Preference Outgoing PT only If a CO button S CO G CO or L CO is selected in Idle Line Preference Outgoing setting by Station or System Programming the PT user can get an idle CO line simply by going off hook Automatic Callback Busy Camp On If the CO line which the extension user tries to get is busy the system will inform the user when the CO line becomes free Hands free operation When the extension user presses a CO S CO G CO or L CO button directly the hands free operation mode is established and the extension user can perform on hook dialing Features Guide General Features Idle Automatic Route Selection ARS Trunk Access Idle functions when Automatic Route Selection ARS is not activated If ARS is activated by System Programming lt Section 2 2 Tenant Automatic Route Selection in the Programming Guide gt the least expensive route for the destination is selected automatically Local Hunt Sequence An idle CO line is selected from the Trunk Group assigned to the extension If multiple Trunk Groups ar
64. are busy the incoming CO call will be handled by the UCD Time Table During a call transfer to the Remote Resource Modem a confirmation tone is not emitted after dialing the FDN for the Remote Resource Features Guide 259 General Features Programming Guide References 2 4 Class of Service COS Trunk Group Setting Transfer to CO Transfer to TIE Automatic Hold e 2 5 System Timer Transfer Recall Time CO to CO Line Call Duration Time e 2 8 System Option Sound source during transfer Transfer recall destination Pressing DSS key operation in CO talking Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Limited Call Duration e Music on Hold e Released Link Operation 1 10 Holding Features e Automatic Hold For Hold 1 11 Transferring Features e One Touch Transfer 1 13 Audible Tone Features e Hold Recall 3 1 TIE Line Features e TIE Line Service User Manual References 4 3 16 Call Transfer 260 Features Guide General Features Intercept Routing Description Provides automatic redirection of incoming CO calls There are the following two types of Intercept Routing Rerouting Activated when an incoming CO call cannot be placed on the destination extension Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA Activated when an incoming CO call is not answered within a specified period of time Intercept time Conditions e Intercept Routing applies to DIL
65. caller s number in a pre programmed way for local or long distance calls e lt System Programming example gt Section 5 11 Caller ID Modification Please refer to Programming Guide 1 Local Call Area Code 201 2 Local Call Digits to delete 3 3 Local Call Number to be added blank 4 Long Distance Call Digits to delete 0 5 Long Distance Call Number to be added 1 Caller s number Recorded 4 and 5 provided by CO caller s number Local call 2011234567 1234567 modified by steps 2 and 3 Long distance call 7149876543 17149876543 modified by steps Installation Manual References e 2 5 5 ELCOT Card KX TD50180 e 2 5 6 BRI Card KX TD50288 e 2 5 7 PRI23 Card KX TD50290 2 7 4 Caller ID Card KX TD193 Features Guide 335 General Features Programming Guide References e 1 2 Slot Assignment e 2 3 Numbering Plan Call Log Incoming Overwrite Mode Call Log Incoming Log Lock e 2 8 System Option Automatic adjustment of the clock using Caller ID information e 4 2 Trunk Line Name e 4 3 Extension Line Initial Display Selection Call Log Incoming Overwrite Mode Call Log Incoming Lock Password e 5 11 Caller ID Modification Local Call Area Code Local Call Digits to delete Local Call Number to be added Long Distance Call Digits to delete Long Distance Call Number to be added e 5 12 Caller ID Registrati
66. calls Every extension is programmed to belong to one of 96 Classes of Service Each Class of Service is programmed to have a toll restriction level for day mode and night mode respectively There are eight toll restriction levels available Toll restriction level 1 is the highest level and the level 8 is the lowest That is level 1 allows all toll calls and levels 7 and 8 disallow all toll calls Levels 2 through 6 are used to restrict calls by combining pre programmed deny and excepted code tables TRS Deny Code Tables An outgoing CO call made by an extension user with a toll restriction level between 2 and 6 is first checked against the selected TRS Deny Code Tables If the leading digits of the dialed number not including the CO line access code are not found in the table the call is made System Programming Toll Restriction TRS Deny is used to make up a TRS Deny Code Table for Levels 2 through 6 respectively Complete every table by storing numbers that are to be prohibited These numbers are defined as deny codes Up to 400 deny codes max 10 digits for each can be stored for TRS Levels 2 through 6 TRS Exception Code Tables These tables are used to override a programmed deny code A call denied by the selected TRS Deny Code Tables is checked against the selected TRS Exception Code Tables and if a match is found the call is made System Programming Toll Restriction TRS Exception is used to make up a TRS Exception Code Tab
67. calls including transferred calls Waiting Queue Waiting Queue i Time Table is programmed Time Table is not programmed Outside Call Transferred calls Time Table procedure Transfer Recall Time Intercept Destination Intercept Destination is not programmed is programmed Intercept Time Transfer Recall starts on the extension who Waiting Queue Intercept Destination originally transferred it 144 Features Guide General Features All Logout Calls to Empty Group Calls to Empty Group are allowed are not allowed S ious 3 n r ce previous page Outside calls Intercomicalis lt Transferred Transferred All Busy intercom calls outside calls Disconnected Overflow Destination Overflow Destination Overflow Overflow is not programmed is programmed Destination is Destination Immediately not programmed is programmed Immediately Overflow Destination Overflow Overflow Destination Destination is not idle is idle Intercept Destination Intercept Destination is not programmed is programmed Immediately Waiting Queue Intercept Cannot be transferred Overflow Destination Destination Notes Overflow destination One of the following five destinations can be assigned as the Overflow destination per UCD Group an extension other Extension Groups other Incoming Groups except DIL 1 N Gro
68. destination of the following calls DISA DID DID ISDN DIL IRNA TIE Conditions 178 e An operator seeking call extension outside may come in on a single operator or all operators in the group at once depending on System Programming e The Operators can perform the special features which are available for the Manager e Operator FDN The treatment of incoming calls to Operator is decided according to Operator FDN setting of the tenant lt Section 2 2 Tenant Operator FDN in the Programming Guide gt If the FDN for Operator Group is set as the destination of Extension Group or Incoming Group calls by the feature number for Operator Call will arrive at the destination If it is set to Blank calls will arrive at the destination of Extension Group Operator Group e Ifthe FDN except for Operator Group is set or if the FDN for Operator Group is set as the destination of Extension Group in other tenants calls will arrive at the destination of Extension Group e An operator seeking incoming call to the PDN of owner extension does not appear on the SDN button e Acall to a single operator hunts for an idle extension as follows lt For Extension Group members gt in numerical order of the extension port physical numbers starting at the extension following the last one called lt For Incoming Group members gt in the order assigned in the Incoming Group It is programmable whether to start a
69. digit 2 was added to the beginning of 311 This results in 2311 DID Dial Registration The System converts the modified number into the destination DN or FDN according to this table Example The System searches for the number 2311 in the table When matching is found the call rings the corresponding extension or floating station DID MDN No Destination Destination Name Max 16 digits Day Night Max 10 characters 2311 200 300 PANASONIC Conditions Hardware Requirements To utilize the DID feature DID card KX T96182 or T1 Digital Trunk card KX T96187 is required e Incoming only DID card KX T96182 DID trunk is used for receiving DID calls only If the extension user attempts to make a call using a DID trunk incoming only the system sends a reorder tone e Both way T1 Digital Trunk card KX T96187 DID trunk is used for both receiving DID calls and making outside calls e A maximum number of digits to be received by DID T1 card is limited to 7 digits e What if the dialing digits received is not enough to decide the call destination If the number of digits received is less than the number which is programmed in Digit to receive DID a reorder tone is sent to the caller or the call is redirected to the IRNA destination IRNA feature This is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 22 Illegal Number DID in the Programming Guide gt e What if t
70. e 2 8 System Option Confirmation tone for Override Barge in Conference and Privacy Release e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key PF Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key PF Key Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Executive Busy Override 1 10 Holding Features e Call Splitting 1 12 Conversation Features e Conference 5 Party e Conference Unattended e Privacy Release User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 21 Conference 3 Party e 4 3 22 Conference 5 Party e 4 3 23 Conference Unattended e 4 3 33 Executive Busy Override e 4 3 63 Privacy Release Features Guide 267 General Features Conference 5 Party Description A PT user can originate a 5 party conference call which includes outside or inside parties or both Conditions e Up to two 5 party conference calls can be held at a time in the system even if TSW Conference Expansion card is installed on the TSW card e Conference call arrangement A 5 party conference call can include both inside and outside parties in any combination Conference trunk At least three idle conference trunks are required to establish a 5 party conference call Executive Busy Override Executive Busy Override does not function to the extension engaged in the 5 party conference call e CONF Conference button If a CONF Conference button is not provided on a PT it can be assig
71. gt RC 16 02 00 01 29PM 1 E1001 T10101 lt INCOMING gt AN 16 02 00 01 29PM 1 E1001 T10101 lt INCOMING gt 00 00 10 02 02 00 03 13PM 1 E1001 Timed Reminder Start 02 02 00 03 13PM 1 E1001 Timed Reminder No Answer 02 02 00 03 13PM 1 E1001 Timed Reminder Answer 02 02 00 03 47PM 1 E1001 Login 02 02 00 03 47PM 1 E1001 Logout 02 02 00 03 47PM 1 E1001 1002 Login 02 02 00 03 47PM 1 E1001 Login 02 02 00 03 47PM 1 E1001 1002 Logout 02 02 00 03 47PM 1 E1001 Logout a 2 O 4 5 N 9 11 12 The SMDR is printed with the above format when Type B is selected as Output Type by S ystem Programming Upper limit of digits characters to be printed e Dial Number 7 Outgoing Call 24 digits e Dial Number 7 Caller ID Name 16 characters e Dial Number 7 Caller ID Dial 21 digits e Acct code 10 10 digits Example of SMDR printout format Explanation 1 Date shows the date of the call in Month Day Year 2 Time shows the end time of a call in Hour Minute AM or PM 92 T Tenant No 1 8 Ext shows the extension number floating number etc which was engaged in the call CO shows the CO line number used for making or receiving the call DN shows the extension number of the PDN owner corresponding with the SDN button used to make an outside call In this case the extension number of the SDN is shown in the 4 Ext column Features Guide General Features 7
72. guest a Timed Reminder alert can be sent to the alert extension when the Alert button indicator on it is turned on in red by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option Alert Ringing in the Programming Guide gt Installation Manual References e 2 6 1 DISA Card KX T96191 Features Guide 223 General Features Programming Guide References e 2 2 Tenant Alert Extension Day Night e 2 3 Numbering Plan Timed Reminder Confirm Set Cancel e 2 5 System Timer Timed Reminder Ringing Time Timed Reminder Arrive Count Timed Reminder Arrive Wait Time e 2 8 System Option Special dial tone after setting feature Alert Ringing e 3 6 OGM Group OGM Type e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key e 10 4SMDR Print out Timed Reminder Information e 10 7 System Time Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Outgoing Message OGM e Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 1 8 Ringing Features e Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call User Manual References e 3 2 1 000 Date and Time Set e 4 3 74 Timed Reminder Wake Up Call e 4 4 6 Outgoing Message OGM Record Playback 224 Features Guide General Features Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call Description Allows the Manager extension and the Operators to remotely set cancel and confirm the wake up call for an extension Conditions Only the latest time setting is valid at the extension whether it was set by the
73. hook depending on System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 15 Special dial tone after setting feature in the Programming Guide gt Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Pickup Dialing Program Set Cancel 2 5 System Timer Pickup Dial Waiting Time e 2 8 System Option Special dial tone after setting feature e 4 3 Extension Line PF Key Pickup Dialing Mode Pickup Dialing Dial Features Guide References 1 7 Dialing Features e Automatic Station Release 208 Features Guide General Features User Manual References e 4 3 62 Pickup Dialing Hot Line Features Guide 209 General Features Quick Dialing Description Allows the extension user to call a desired party by dialing a short code Quick Dialing is convenient for room service calls in a hotel for example Conditions e To utilize this feature an extension number or a telephone number should be stored beforehand either by User or System Programming e Up to eight quick dial numbers up to 24 digits for each can be stored in the system e Assign a feature number in program Numbering Plan first and then a quick dial number in program Quick Dialing in order for Quick Dialing to be effective Example To assign the extension number 1001 in quick dial number 3 a Change or clear the feature numbers which have 3 in the first digit in program Numbering Plan b Assign 3 in the selection
74. mode Programming Guide References e 2 8 System Option Off hook Monitor Features Guide References 1 12 Conversation Features e Hands free Operation User Manual References e 4 3 41 Hands free Operation 4 3 51 Off Hook Monitor Features Guide 279 General Features Privacy Release Description Allows the PT user to release Automatic Privacy for an existing call in order to establish a 3 party call During a conversation with an outside party on a CO button the extension user can allow another extension user to join in the existing call by pressing the CO button Conditions Confirmation Tone When a 2 party call is changed to a 3 party conference call and vice versa a confirmation tone is sent to all three parties Eliminating the tone is programmable lt Section 2 8 System Option 8 Confirmation tone for Override Barge in Conference and Privacy Release in the Programming Guide gt e This feature overrides Data Line Security and Executive Busy Override Deny Programming Guide References e 2 8 System Option Confirmation tone for Override Barge in Conference and Privacy Release e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key Features Guide References 1 9 Answering Features e Executive Busy Override Deny 1 12 Conversation Features e Conference 3 Party e Data Line Security e Privacy Automatic User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assign
75. network but with other locations of the company in the private network of which your KX TD500 can be a part To make a call to a person at a distant company location an extension user must first obtain the appropriate TIE line to that person s PBX and then dial the extension number only or a location number plus extension number A Network of TIE Lines 1 Interfaced by a TIE channel of T1 Digital KX TD500 or other KX TD500 manufacturers PBX TI TIE Line Digital T Digital trunk Digital trunk TIE channel TIE channel Hardware Requirement T1 Digital Trunk card KX T96187 2 Interfaced by a PRI23 card Digital Qsig KX TD500 or other KX TD500 manufacturers PBX PRI23 PRI23 Line Digital PR 23 Master Hardware Requirement PRI23 card KX TD50290 Numbering Plan Extension users can make a call over the TIE Line Network to other extension users in a distant location by one of the following two ways Please refer to TIE Line and TIE Line Connection a Extension Number only Extension Number Features Guide TIE Line Features b Location Number PBX Code Extension Number TIE Line Access Code PBX Code Extension Number or CO TIE button Routing Procedure 1 TIE Routing Table Provides for the routing of calls over the TIE Line Network Up to 36 routing patterns can be programmed in this table This table i
76. or voice signaled by Station Programming e Any extension PT SLT user can use this feature during an intercom call if the other party is a PT extension e Ifthe other party is an SLT extension only Ring Calling mode is available e One time switching Switching of signaling mode is available only once during a call e Voice signaling is not available in the following cases if the other extension is an SLT if the other extension is busy on another call if another call is ringing on the other extension Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Inter Office Calling 1 9 Answering Features e Hands free Answerback Features Guide 153 General Features User Manual References e 2 2 7 Intercom Alert Assignment e 4 3 3 Alternate Calling Ring Voice e 4 3 40 Hands free Answerback e 4 3 42 Inter Office Calling 154 Features Guide General Features Automatic Callback Busy Camp On Description The system calls back the extension user when the called party or the selected CO line becomes idle if this feature was activated beforehand Automatic Callback Extension If the extension user answers the callback ringing the called extension previously busy automatically starts ringing Automatic Callback Trunk If the extension user answers the callback ringing the designated CO line previously busy is au
77. out Trunk to Trunk Connection Before utilizing this feature Trunk to Trunk Restriction should be enabled by System Programming e You can store the telephone number up to 24 digits Valid digits are 0 through 9 and PAUSE PAUSE button can also be stored by dialing x e This feature does not apply to the unscreened transfer call Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Call FWD Do Not Disturb Set Cancel e 2 4 Class of Service COS Call FWD to CO TIE Time Limit of Outside Calls Trunk Group Setting Call FWD Follow Me e 2 5 System Timer Call Forwarding No Answer Time Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time CO to CO Line Call Duration Time e 2 7 Trunk to Trunk Restriction e 2 8 System Option Special dial tone after setting feature FWD DND lamp pattern e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key PF Key Call Forwarding No Answer Time e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key PF Key 254 Features Guide General Features Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Limited Call Duration 3 1 TIE Line Features e TIE Line and Outside CO Line Connection User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 9 Call Forwarding 4 3 27 Do Not Disturb DND e 4 3 83 VPS Integration Features Guide 255 General Features Call Forwarding All Calls to an Incoming Group Description Allow
78. possible Red On SDN in use SDN on exclusive hold Red slow flash SDN on hold Red moderate flash Red rapid flash A CO call is coming in on multiple extensions simultaneously Features Guide Items marked with X are only available on the Single CO button 325 General Features LED Indication and the line status SDN button LED Indication Line Status Off Idle Green On You are using the line Green slow flash You have a held call Green moderate flash You have one of the following 1 Exclusive hold 2 Consultation hold 3 Conference unattended Green rapid flash Hold Recall Automatic Callback Busy Privacy Release possible Red On PDN in use PDN on exclusive hold Red slow flash PDN on hold Red moderate flash Red rapid flash A call is coming in e Items marked with x are only available on the Single CO button Conditions None Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References 1 16 Button Features e Button Line Access User Manual References Not applicable 326 Features Guide General Features 1 17 Display Features Absent Message Capability Description Once set this option provides a message on the display of the calling extension to show the reason for the called extension s absence Up to nine absent messages common to all
79. procedure can be assigned as follows Table No Sequence 1 S1 4T 2T gt S2 TR gt 2 S1 2T S3 OFF gt gt gt 3 1T TR gt gt gt gt gt 4 S1 2T S4 2T gt TR gt gt Example 1 S1 4T 2T S2 TR LI 1 2 3 4 Lo UCD group 1 The caller hears OGM 1 if available Sample OGM 1 Sorry all lines are busy Please wait a moment e What if OGM 1 is busy The caller first hears a ringback tone and then will hear OGM 1 as soon as it becomes available Go to step 2 e What if OGM 1 is OUS Out of Service Step 1 will be skipped Go to step 2 2 The caller is put in the waiting queue for 48 seconds 4T 2T 3 The caller hears OGM 2 Sample OGM 2 Sorry all lines are still busy Calling the Operator 4 The caller is transferred to the Overflow destination Operator or covering extension Note e During Steps 1 3 the caller will be connected to a UCD group member as soon as anyone of members becomes available to answer the call Features Guide 147 General Features Example 2 S1 2T S3 OFF VD a O A Lo UCD group 1 The caller hears OGM 1 if available Sample OGM 1 Sorry all lines are busy Please wait a moment e What if OGM 1 is busy The caller first hears a ringback tone and then will hear OGM 1 as soon as it b
80. red lit Alarm button If the red lit Alarm button is pressed again whether the problem is solved or not the Alarm light goes off and the display PT shows the initial display Date and Time or Self Extension number E LED on PT Top Shel OFF ON The Alarm light turns red and the corresponding error message is shown on the display PT automatically if it is idle This situation continues until the problem will be solved Features Guide 113 General Features When the problem is solved A B C D LED on PT essen ON no change LED on Top Shelf Card u ON OFF E LED on PT Top Shel ON OFF When the problem is solved the Alarm light goes off and the display PT shows the initial display Conditions e Alarm button assignment Alarm button can be assigned to a flexible CO button on PT by Station User or System Programming e Alarm LED indication Major alarm Priority 1 Red moderate flash Minor alarm Priority 2 Red On e If multiple errors occur at a time only the error with highest priority will be displayed by pressing the red lit Alarm button Programming Guide References e 2 2 Tenant Manager Extension DN e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key Features Guide References None User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 4 5 Local Alarm 114 Fe
81. seta CPC signal to the PBX line for this signal to work for CO calls Conditions e Start AA Service after FWD IRNA of CO call When an outside call is routed to a VM port by Call Forwarding or IRNA feature AA Service can be activated instead of VM Service by System Programming e Call from AA port to AA port Prevents or allows a call originated by an AA port of VPS to another AA port 46 Features Guide General Features Programming Guide References 1 4 Extension Port Assignment Group No 1 5 VPS DPT Port Assignment 2 3 Numbering Plan Login Logout 3 3 Extension Group FDN Tenant No Overflow Setting Destination Day Night Overflow Setting Timer Group Type 4 2 Trunk Line Destination Day Night Lunch Break 4 3 Extension Line Group No COS No Primary COS No Secondary Mailbox No 5 10 VPS Integration Integration Code Ringback Tone Integration Code Busy Tone Integration Code Reorder Tone Integration Code DND Tone Integration Code Extension Answer Integration Code Extension Disconnection Integration Code Confirmation Tone Integration Code FWD to VM Ringback Tone Integration Code FWD to VM Busy Tone Integration Code FWD to Extension Ringback Tone Start AA service after FWD IRNA of CO call Call from AA port to AA port Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Exten
82. the Programming Guide gt Tenant Service If Tenant Service is employed only the extension names within the same tenant are displayed Station Speed Dialing Directory e Itis necessary to program Station Speed Dialing Numbers and Names into one of the 10 Function buttons F1 through F10 Initial Display Selection Initial display of Station Speed Dialing Directory Number or Name is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 10 Station Speed Dialing Initial Display in the Programming Guide gt An extension user can change the setting by Station Programming lt Section 2 2 17 Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment KX T7235 KX T743 1 KX T7433 KX T7436 only in the User Manual gt System Speed Dialing Directory e System Speed Dialing numbers and names can be programmed either by User Programming lt Section 3 2 2 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set and Section 3 2 3 002 System Speed Dialing Name Set gt or System Programming lt Section 5 2 System Speed Dialing in the Programming Guide gt Features Guide 331 General Features e Both Name and Number should be stored in pairs for each System Speed Dialing No Otherwise Name is not shown on a large display PT e Tenant Service If Tenant Service is employed System Speed Dialing numbers and names being displayed is limited within the same tenant Programming Guide References e 2 8 System Option Station
83. user to join log in or leave log out the group They can leave the group temporarily when they are away from their desks to prevent calls being sent to their extensions They can return to the group when they are ready to answer calls This feature can be categorized as follows Log In Log Out Allows members extension users of an Extension Group except Group Type None and Phantom Extensions to join log in or leave log out the group Group Log In Log Out Allows members extension users of an Incoming Group to join group log in or leave group log out the group e The lighting patterns and status of the Log In Log Out Group Log In Log Out button are shown below The lighting patterns and status of the Log In Log Out Group Log In Log Out button Lighting pattern Status Off Log In no calls Red On Log Out Red slow flash UCD Group Log In waiting calls only Tt is shown on the Log In Log Out button of the Extension Group members or Group Log In Log Out button corresponding with the Incoming Group Conditions 218 Log In Log Out Group Log In Log Out button Log In Log Out Group Log In Log Out button can be assigned to a flexible CO button by Station User or System Programming e When extensions are logged out calls directed to the above mentioned group do not come in on their extension However calls directed to their individual extension extension call DIL 1 1 etc
84. using an SDN button on his own PT a Own Extension Default His own toll restriction level determined by COS programming is applied to the call b PDN Toll restriction level of the PDN owner is applied to the call SDN buttons can be used to answer the following types of call which come in on its associated PDN DIL 1 1 DISA DID DID ISDN MDN UCD Call hunting IRNA Extension TIE Features Guide General Features Programming Guide References 2 2 Tenant Automatic Route Selection e 2 4 Class of Service COS Trunk Group Setting SDN COS e 2 6 Local Hunt Sequence e 3 2 Trunk Group e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Automatic Route Selection ARS e Inter Office Calling e PDN Call Trunk Access 1 9 Answering Features e Answering Direct Trunk 1 11 Transferring Features e Ringing Transfer 1 13 Audible Tone Features e Ringing Delayed e Ringing Tone Selection 1 16 Button Features e Button Direct Station Selection DSS e LED Indication User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 2 2 13 Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons e 2 2 14 Ringing Tone Selection for INTERCOM Button e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 2 1 Making Calls e 4 2 2 Receiving Calls e 4 3 5 Answering Direct Trunk e 4 3 54 Outward Dialing Trunk Access Features Guide 317 General Features
85. 0 Electronic Station Lockout 4 4 9 Remote Station Lock Control Features Guide 89 General Features Secret Dialing Description Used to conceal all or part of aregistered telephone number that normally appears on the display Secret Dialing applies to the following features e One Touch Dialing e System Speed Dialing e Station Speed Dialing Special display features When a display PT user makes a call using a telephone number with Secret Dialing all or part of the number does not appear on the display Conditions e CO line access code must be placed before placing s or T e One or more parts of a telephone number can be concealed e The concealed part will be printed out by SMDR Programming Guide References 5 2 System Speed Dialing Features Guide References 1 7 Dialing Features e One Touch Dialing e System Speed Dialing 1 17 Display Features e Call Directory User Manual References 90 e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 70 Secret Dialing Features Guide General Features Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Description Station Message Detail Recording SMDR automatically records detailed call information for CO calls A printer connected to SIO 2 port of RS 232C on the basic shelf can be used to print incoming and outgoing CO calls To print the call records use the program SMDR which allows you to print out the foll
86. A Off Hook Call Announcement is activated when the called extension is KX T7130 KX T7235 or KX T7436 Whisper OHCA is activated when both calling and called extensions are using one of the KX T7400 series PTs e BSS OHCA and Whisper OHCA do not function if the other extension is a DN type PT Hardware Requirements DPT Basic shelf expansion shelf 1 2 have 16 OHCA paths which are connected each other e APT To utilize this feature the OHCA card should be installed on a PLC card or HLC card beforehand e DPT To utilize this feature the DOHCA card should be installed on the TSW card beforehand 174 Features Guide General Features e DLC card with DPT A DLC card allows 8 DPTs that can be called with the OHCA feature at the same time e DHLC card with DPT A DHLC card allows 8 DPTs that can be called with the OHCA feature at the same time e DHLC card with APT A DHLC card allows one APT telephone that can be called with the OHCA feature at the same time Installation Manual References e 2 3 3 DOHCA Card e 2 7 2 OHCA Card KX T96136 Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Call Waiting Set Cancel e 2 4 Class of Service COS Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Busy Station Signaling BSS e Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper 1 9 Answering Features e Call Waiting User Manual References e 4 3 17 Call Waiting
87. A a ee 27 Door Opener ran ae RL E OR E ETR 28 Extension Group iis eed an aa nanan aa ae ea a a eaaa e E diane 29 External Modem Control u 00 aa eae E 32 Blexible Numbenins 2 2 2022 cued iii ie Ace a tet 34 Floating Station ssta0hovie Gate iin ees an sh ls ee oe eee eee 39 Host PBX ACCESS iecscicieck shshagessthsettbacesceb alate bale aaa ae iea ei 41 Incoming Groupie rn e aa ee as E ees a ee ee a 42 Integration Automated Attendant AA Service oo ce ecccceesseceeneceeeeeeeeeeeaeceaceceeeeesas 45 Integration DET cn 21 2222 Hensel inane 48 Integration Inb nd 2 u2 3 2 nee E A a aa aA EA E NEETER REESE 51 Integration Voice Mail VM Service ussesssenssenssnnnnnessnnensnnnnnnnnennensnennnnnnnnnnn 54 Integration VPS ansete i ei Aa A end A ee el a cea 60 Limited Call D fatio Meic aia Re Rl a ai th dered eager ene 62 L ckout 2 2 a nea se he el 64 Manager Extension nnana prea e E E aA AT A EEE AAE EREE 65 Mixed Station Capabilities u 2 2 22 done ea III 66 Music ontHold sie ics ect nites eein anita eon eA a na 68 Night Service aane R E A E E S 70 Off Premise Extension OPX usouse n N ASENA ENES 73 Operator Groups ied a E E E E E Ga eae 74 Outgoing Message OGM 2 2 2 2 2 2 ene Gai eea t at ak 79 Outgoing Message OGM Group uu susensesssensessnesnnesnnesnennnnnnnnesnnnsnensnnsnsensnensnennnn sen 81 P ralleled Teleph ne 4 02 82 Phantom Extensi ni z
88. Allows the extension user to override toll restriction temporarily to make a toll call from a toll restricted telephone The extension user can carry out this feature by entering the appropriate account code before dialing the telephone number Flow Chart of TRS Toll Restriction Override Procedure by Account Code Entry TRS Override by Account Code Entry is attempted Option y Verified All Calls What is the Account Code Mode Verified Toll Restriction Override Y ee Is the entered code identified with the stored codes Yes Is the entered code identified u Is the TRS level Level 1 with the stored code j No Yes No TRS level changes to the level appended to the Account Code entered The call is not allowed gt Toll Restriction check starts A reorder tone is returned to the user Conditions 192 Class of Service COS programming This feature applies to the extension user whose Account Code Mode is set to Verified Toll Restriction Override by COS Programming TRS Level for Account Code Each account code has its own TRS level The TRS level of the extension user is changed according to the account code entered However if the TRS level of the account code entered is lower than that of the extension toll restriction check is performed against the TRS level of the extension This feature applies to the e
89. Answer IRNA to a VM extension If an incoming CO call directed to a certain extension is not answered within a specified period of time IRNA timer the call is redirected to a VM extension with Follow on ID of the corresponding extension Outside Call DID DID ISDN DIL 1 1 DISA TIE System VPS Extension EN VM 1 gt VM 2 Extension Group u ee VM X VM 3 3 Transfer by VM Transfer button VM Transfer button is used to transfer a call to a VM extension with Follow on ID of the corresponding extension so that the caller can leave the message in the mailbox of the destination extension user without knowing the mailbox number Outside Call DID DID ISDN DIL 1 1 DISA TIE System 1 Transfer 2 Transfer r Extension Extension gt VM I gt VM2 busy no answer RD oe vere A Extension Group VM o VM X VM 3 4 Notification by Message Waiting Lamp If the caller leaves a message in a mailbox the VPS notifies the corresponding extension user that there is a message in his mailbox by turning on the Message Waiting Lamp on his extension The extension user can listen to the message simply by pressing the red lit Message Waiting Lamp 56 Features Guide General Features
90. Assign the above Routing Plan Table D to ARS Routing Plan in the Programming Guide Enter the Trunk Group numbers in order of priority If the specified Trunk Group requires digits modification assign the appropriate Digits Modification Table number 01 to 48 This table is required to have the system automatically add a specific carrier access code to the extension user dialed number Table E Example ARS Routing Plan Time A Time B Time C Time D TRG Modify TRG Modify TRG Modify TRG Modify Priority 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 Priority 1 1 3 3 2 2 2 Priority 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 TRG Trunk Group No Modify Modification Table No Note e Upto 16 Priorities 01 16 can be utilized in the system Step 5 Create ARS Digits Modification Table Carriers E F and G match the Trunk Groups and Modification Tables as follows and have the following Access Code Table F Carrier TRG Mod Access Code Table E 1 1 0 333 F 2 1 0 555 G 3 1 0 666 158 Features Guide General Features According to Table F enter the Access Codes in the respective Modification Tables as follows Table G Example ARS Digits Modification Table Modification Modification Modification Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Enter the number of digits to be deleted Add 10333 Add 10555 Add 10666 Enter the number to be added Remove 0 Remove 0 Remove 0
91. Buttons on Proprietary Telephones and DSS Consoles Description Buttons on KX T Proprietary Telephones Proprietary Telephones and DSS Consoles are provided with the feature line access buttons listed below The functions of the listed buttons are also described Buttons 7020 7030 7050 7055 7130 7220 7230 7235 7250 7420 7425 7431 7433 7436 7450 7320 7330 7335 AUTO ANSWER Y v v vV vvV vv vv v iv A MUTE AUTODIAL Y v v v v v v v v v vV vV vV v v STORE Co v v vV vV vV vV v vV vV vV vVv vV v v v 12 12 12 6 C2 24 24 2 KH 12 24 42 24 24 12 CONF v v v iv iv vVv v iv vv vv v iv A FLASH v v v v vV vV AMI VWI VWI vVY v vV vr vv Function v oY 10 10 FWD DND 4 v v_ v v vV v vV vV vV v v HOLD v v v v vV v vV v v vV v iv v iviv INTERCOM A v_ vV vV vV vV v vV vV vV vV vV vr v v Jog Dial v v v V vr v MESSAGE v v v vV v vV vv vv v iv A MODE v MONITOR v v Vv v PAUSE Y Y U U Viv v v vV v iv v N a u A Feature 4 a2 PROGRAM Vi VWI VWI vV v vVY v vVY vr v REDIAL v v_ vV vV vV vV v vV v vV vV vV vr vr v SAVE v SELECT v 318 Features Guide General Features
92. CO Button Assignment Features Guide 257 General Features Call Transfer Description Allows the extension user to transfer a call extension CO TIE to another party The following types are available Feature Type Transferring method PENRE to Extension Transfers a call to the extension or the external party after to CO TIE Line 2 voice announcement to Extension Transfers a call to the extension or the external party Uhr reened without a voice announcement to CO TIE Line While listening for the ringback tone after dialing the destination number you can replace the handset Conditions General e Music on Hold or Ringback Tone If Music on Hold is enabled music is sent to the caller while being transferred It is programmable whether to send aringback tone or Music on Hold to the caller lt Section 2 8 System Option 1 Sound source during transfer in the Programming Guide gt Screened Unscreened To Extension e The DSS Console and the Proprietary Telephone user can hold an outside call and quickly transfer it to an extension by pressing the corresponding DSS button directly One Touch Transfer by DSS Button However it cannot be performed when there is another call on Consultation Hold If One Touch Transfer mode is disabled the extension user transfers an outside call by pressing the DSS button followed by the TRANSFER button Consultation Hold Established by pres
93. Call Log Incoming Live Call Screening LCS Password Clear Call Log Incoming Log Lock Log In Log Out Call Park Message Waiting Call Pickup access deny Paging access answer deny Call Waiting Paralleled Telephone set cancel Data Line Security Pickup Dialing Hot Line Day Night Switching Mode Station Program Clear Do Not Disturb set cancel Timed Reminder Wake Up Call Door Opener Walking COS Doorphone Call e In addition to the features above the Manager and the Operators can execute the following features Background Music BGM External Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call Outgoing Message OGM Record Playback Trunk Busy out Setting Remote DND Do Not Disturb Control Trunk Route Control Remote FWD Call Forwarding Cancel Once UCD Monitor Mode Switching COS Conditions None 346 Features Guide General Features Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References None User Manual References e 4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features System Feature Access Menu e 4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features System Feature Access Menu Features Guide 347 General Features 348 Features Guide ISDN Features Section 2 ISDN Features Features Guide 349 ISDN Features 2 1 ISDN Features Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Description Integrated Services Digital
94. Code Used to allow certain extension users TIE Line and Outside CO Line Connection If TIE to CO Security Mode of the Trunk Line is set to Yes an extension user must enter a valid DISA TIE User Code before making TIE Line and Outside CO Line Connection e Making TIE Line and Outside CO Line Connection is available only when your system employs PBX Code Location number method for making receiving TIE calls Programming Guide References e 2 7 Trunk to Trunk Restriction e 4 2 Trunk Line DID TIE Digits to delete DID TIE Number to be added TIE Line TIE to CO Security Mode 5 9 DISA TIE User Code e 8 2 TIE Routing Table PBX Code Features Guide References 1 11 Transferring Features e Call Forwarding e Call Transfer Features Guide 375 TIE Line Features TIE Line and TIE Line Connection Description TIE calls among several different company locations can be done by dialing a 3 or 4 digit extension number only or by dialing a location number PBX Code and an extension number 1 Extension Number only 1 Extension users can make a call via TIE line to other extension users in other PBXs within a private network simply by dialing a 3 or 4 digit extension number A Network of TIE Lines PBX Code None PBX 1 Extension numbers 1000 1199 Ext 1000 Call Flow 1 Ext 1000 dials 2000 2 Ext 1000 is connected to Ext 2000 of PBX 2 Programming example
95. DISA TAFAS DID DID ISDN TIE Call Forwarding and Station Hunting e IRNA destinations The final destination of intercepted calls can be programmed for day and night modes individually There are seven possible destinations 1 an extension 2 an external pager 3 a DISA outgoing message 4 an Extension Group 5 an Incoming Group except DIL 1 N Group 6 a phantom extension 7 an ISDN extension except the wild card character X e Do Not Disturb Even if the destination is in Do Not Disturb mode it does not function and the call re directed by Intercept Routing is placed there e IRNA destinations can be assigned either on an Extension Line basis or on a Trunk Group basis e If an outside call DIL 1 N TAFAS etc is not directed to individual extension the call is redirected to the intercept destination assigned on a Trunk Group basis not on an Extension Line basis e If Intercept destination is not programmed on an Extension Line basis the call is redirected to the Intercept destination assigned on a Trunk Group basis e If an outside call is routed to a Call Forwarding destination by Call Forwarding feature and then not answered within a specified period of time the system redirects the call to the IRNA destination assigned by the Call Forwarding destination e When an outside call directed to an ISDN extension is not answered within a specified period of time the call is redirected to an extension assigned on a T
96. DPT integration e g KX TVS100 Features Guide 283 General Features 1 13 Audible Tone Features Confirmation Tones Description 284 A confirmation tone indicates that an action was accepted by the system and the extension user can proceed to the next operation At the end of various operations the extension user can confirm the success of the operation by hearing a confirmation tone Confirmation tone 1 a Indicates that the new setting differs from the previous setting b Set or cancel the Electronic Station Lockout ls Confirmation tone 2 a Indicates that the new setting is identical to the previous one b In addition sent when various features are successfully performed or accessed e g Call Hold Automatic Callback Busy c Sent when accessing external paging equipment e g Paging All Paging External A confirmation tone from external pagers can be enabled or disabled by System Programming ls i Confirmation tone 3 Sent when a conversation is established just after dialing For example when accessing the following features by the feature numbers e Call Park Retrieve e Call Pickup e Call Hold Retrieve e Paging Paging Answer e TAFAS Answer This tone can be eliminated by System Programming so that the user can start talking instantly ls i Features Guide General Features Confirmation tone 4 Sent when a 2 party call is changing to a 3 part
97. Delayed Ringing Assignment 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Features Guide 291 General Features Ringing Discriminating Description Allows the extension user to identify the incoming call by the ringing pattern Please refer to Section 4 Tones Ring Tones Conditions e Call Ringing Priority When there are multiple incoming calls and the extension goes from off hook to on hook the calls ring according to the following priority Consultation Hold Recall Noe An incoming call from a line in which the Prime Line Preference Incoming function has been set PT only Call Waiting Incoming calls Hold Recall Transfer Recall Unattended Conference Recall Timed Reminder Non bh OW Automatic Callback Busy Prime Line Preference Incoming When multiple calls are ringing simultaneously at a PT on which Prime Line Preference Incoming feature is assigned the extension user can answer the call on the prime line simply by going off hook Ringing Tone Selection The DPT user can select a desired ringing tone type for CO ICM and DN buttons Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References 1 13 Audible Tone Features e Ringing Tone Selection User Manual References e 2 2 13 Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons 292 Features Guide General Features 1 14 Paging Features Paging Description Allows an extension user to mak
98. Exception Codes override the Deny Codes Features Guide 187 General Features Flow Chart of Toll Restriction The user makes a toll call Is the call made by System Speed Yes Dialing No No Is TRS Override for System Speed Dialing enabled Yes Levels 7 8 What is the extension toll Level 1 sl restriction level Levels 2 3 4 5 6 Y Is the dialed number found in No a applicable TRS Deny Code Tables Yes Y Is the dialed number found in applicable Yes TRS Exception Code Tables No gt Y Y The call is allowed The call is denied A reorder tone is returned to the user Conditions WARNING The software contained in TRS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognize newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they 188 Features Guide General Features are placed into service Failure to upgrade the premises PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognize the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and the customer s employees from gaining access to the network and to these codes KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA Toll restriction checks are applied to the following a Automatic Route Selection ARS b Account Code Entry c Trunk Access Idle d Trunk Access Trunk Group e Tr
99. Extension through Busy Lamp Field of the corresponding DSS button The mailbox number can be assigned on an Incoming Group basis When an incoming call is redirected to a VM extension by IRNA or Overflow feature the system sends the digits of this mailbox number to the VPS When Mailbox No is set to Blank the system sends the FDN to the VPS If there is any message waiting notification in the mailbox of an Incoming Group the message waiting lamp on the members of the Incoming Group will not turn on If the mailbox number of the extension is assigned as that of an Incoming Group a message waiting notification to the Incoming Group is left on the corresponding extension The extension user can listen to the message in his mailbox simply by pressing the red lit MESSAGE lamp Programming Guide References 1 4 Extension Port Assignment Group No 2 3 Numbering Plan Login Logout 3 5 Incoming Group Group No FDN 4 3 Extension Line Group No 4 7 ISDN Extension Line Group No Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e DIL 1 N Group e Floating Station e Operator Group 1 5 Attended Features e Ring Group e Uniform Call Distribution UCD Features Guide 43 General Features 1 8 Ringing Features e Log In Log Out e Station Hunting User Manual References Not applicable 44 Features Guide General Features Integration Automated Attendant AA Service Description
100. Flexible Feature Numbers Number Feature Default 01 1st Hundred Block Extension 10 02 2nd Hundred Block Extension 11 03 3rd Hundred Block Extension 12 04 4th Hundred Block Extension 13 05 5th Hundred Block Extension 14 06 6th Hundred Block Extension 20 07 7th Hundred Block Extension 21 08 8th Hundred Block Extension 22 09 9th Hundred Block Extension 23 10 10th Hundred Block Extension 24 11 16 11th through 16th Hundred Block Extension Blank 17 Operator Call 0 18 Local CO Line Access ARS 9 19 Trunk Group Access 8 20 Speed Dialing System x 21 Speed Dialing Station 3 22 Speed Dialing Station Programming 30 23 Doorphone Call 31 24 External Paging 32 25 External Paging Answer TAFAS Answer 42 26 Station Paging 33 34 Features Guide General Features Flexible Feature Numbers Number Feature Default 27 Station Paging Answer 43 28 CO Call Pickup 4x 29 Group Call Pickup 40 30 Directed Call Pickup 41 31 Hold 50 32 Hold Retrieve Station 51 33 Hold Retrieve Trunk 53 34 Redial 35 Call Park Call Park Retrieve 52 36 Account Code 49 37 Door Open 55 38 External Feature Access 6 39 Station Program Clear 790 40 Message Waiting Set Cancel Call Back 70 41 OGM Playback Record 36 42 Call FWD Do Not Disturb Set Cancel 710 43 Dial
101. Group e Phantom Extension User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 4 3 45 Log In Log Out e 4 3 80 UCD Login Monitor Features Guide 219 General Features Station Hunting Description If a called extension is busy Station Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle extension within the same Extension Group Incoming Group Idle extensions are automatically searched for according to the pre determined hunting type Extension Group Hunting Type Description Circular physical numbers Installing additional cards may change the The extensions are searched in the order of the extension port order in a circular way until an idle one is found Terminate order in a linear way until an idle one is found or the The extensions are searched in the order of the extension port physical numbers Installing additional cards may change the extension with the highest physical number in the group is reached Station Hunting Group can be made up by assigning the group type of an Extension Group as Circular or Terminate Up to 128 Station Hunting Groups each consisting of more than one extension in the same tenant can be created in the system Incoming Group Hunting Type Description The idle extension is searched in the order assigned in the Terminate Incoming Group always starting at the first as
102. IE Line Features Routing Procedure 3 Routing Flow Chart 2 Analyzing digits sent from the other PBX Does the leading 3 digits of the received digits match your PBX Code No Yes Is your PBX s CO access code or extension number included in the received digits Yes No Is there a CO access code of ea your PBX in the received dig its Yes Is Trunk to Trunk No Restriction of the selected Calling to CO Trunk Group set to Yes I Yes Sends reorder tone No Is there your PBX s extension No Is it an extension number of o number in the received digits other PBX s Sends reorder tone Yes Yes Does that extension actually No Trunk Group for making an exist outgoing TIE call is decided Ve by a Routing Table Is it idle No Sends busy Yes Restriction of the selected received from one Trunk Group set to Yes PBX t ther Calling to the specified P o another Yes N on Is Trunk to Trunk No Sends digits extension L Sends reorder tone Features Guide 385 TIE Line Features Conditions Basic Programming The Programming items listed in the following Programming Guide References are always required to make use of TIE lines Application Programming Programming items required v
103. In this case incoming calls redirected to the destination will be signaled d When a TIE call comes in e Confirmation Tone A confirmation tone is sent to the extension user before being connected to the caller Eliminating the tone is programmable lt Section 2 8 System Option 9 Confirmation tone for Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Answer Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve in the Programming Guide gt Installation Manual References e 2 8 1 External Pager Paging Equipment Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan External Paging Answer TAFAS Answer e 2 8 System Option Confirmation tone for Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Answer Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve e 4 2 Trunk Line Incoming Type Destination Day Night Lunch Break e 4 6 External Paging Tenant No FDN 136 Features Guide General Features Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Floating Station User Manual References 4 3 78 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS Features Guide 137 General Features Uniform Call Distribution UCD Description 138 Calls to a UCD group are distributed uniformly among the group members so that each member can share the same load This UCD feature is particularly helpful when a certain extension receives a high volume of calls compared with other extensions This feature can be categorized as follows Extension Gro
104. Incoming and outgoing calls on the line are shown on the button in the following priority S CO gt G CO gt L CO e Itis possible to assign one CO line to both an S CO and a G CO button on the same PT at a time S CO Busy Idle Status An S CO button indicator provides busy idle status of the CO line e The same CO line cannot be assigned to more than one S CO button on a PT e ARS Override If Automatic Route Selection ARS is set it is overridden by an outgoing call made by pressing the S CO button G CO e The same Trunk Group can be assigned to more than one different G CO button on the same PT e ARS Override If Automatic Route Selection ARS is set it is overridden by an outgoing call made by pressing the G CO button L CO e Local Access ARS Pressing the L CO button provides the same operation as dialing the feature number for Local CO Line Access ARS Default 9 This results in Trunk Access Idle or Automatic Route Selection ARS depending on System Programming Features Guide 315 General Features 316 DN General DN Button Assignment flexible CO A DN button PDN SDN can be assigned to a flexible CO button on a PT by Station User or System Programming PDN Up to three PDN buttons can be assigned per PT and at least one PDN button should always be assigned to the CO 01 button SDN Up to eight SDN buttons per PDN button can be assigned to eight different PTs respectively U
105. Integration If VPS Integration is employed a VM extension informs an extension that a message is left in his mailbox by turning on the MESSAGE lamp The extension user can listen to the message in the mailbox simply by pressing the red lit MESSAGE lamp e Call Forwarding A message waiting notification is left on the Call Forwarding setting extension regardless of a type of Call Forwarding features except for To CO TIE Line and No Answer to CO TIE Line Station Hunting A message waiting notification to an extension in the station hunting group is treated in the same manner as the ordinary call e A message can be canceled from the sending extension or from the receiving extension e Up to 448 message indications can be set in the system Features Guide 343 General Features Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Message Waiting Set Cancel Call Back e 2 8 System Option Message Waiting lamp pattern e 4 3 Extension Line Message Lamp CO Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key e 5 10 VPS Integration Turn off control of Message Waiting lamp Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Integration Voice Mail VM Service User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 46 Message Waiting 4 3 83 VPS Integration 344 Features Guide General Features Special Display Features Description With the dis
106. Line CO Key Intercept Destination Day Night e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key e 4 5 Doorphone Destination Day Night e 9 2 DID Dial Registration Destination Day Night Features Guide References None User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 48 Night Service On Off 7 Features Guide General Features Off Premise Extension OPX Description SLTs installed off the premise can be operated via a public or private network in the same way as extensions on the premise These telephones are called Off Premise Extensions OPX Conditions Hardware Requirements OPX card KX T96185 or T1 Digital Trunk card KX T96187 and OPX Power Unit KX T96186 are required e Ring Tone Pattern Any call to an OPX telephone rings like a CO call e Call Restriction Calls between OPX and Doorphone are restricted That is both Calling from OPX to Doorphone and Calling from Doorphone to OPX are not possible Installation Manual References e 2 3 4 Power Unit e 2 4 5 OPX Card KX T96185 e 2 5 4 T1 Digital Trunk Card KX T96187 Programming Guide References e 1 6 T1 Port Assignment Channel Type DN e 4 3 Extension Line Features Guide References None User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 73 General Features Operator Group Description It is efficient to handle a high volume of ope
107. Line Features 3 1 TIE Line Features Outside CO Line and TIE Line Connection Description TIE lines are usually used to link two or more distant locations where high volume calling traffic exists However a person at a location outside of the TIE Line Network can also use it by first making aCO call via public network to the nearest point of TIE Line Network for the purpose of saving the toll call charge 1 When a caller makes a CO call via DISA line A Network of TIE Lines is Local ae TIE Line Branch l I l I l Employee 1 Ext 1000 Inside of the TIE Line Network Call Flow 1 Employee 1 at a local branch makes a CO call to PBX 1 via DISA line 2 Employee 1 dials 77 TIE Line Access Code 3 Employee 1 dials 951 1000 4 Employee 1 at a local branch will be connected to Ext 1000 of PBX 2 Programming example To make up the TIE Line Network above the following System Programming is required at PBX 1 and 2 respectively PBX 1 e 2 7 Trunk to Trunk Restriction e 8 2 TIE Routing Table PBX Code 950 370 Features Guide TIE Line Features No Leading Digitsto Number to Trunk Group No Digit delete be added 01 02 03 04 05 01 951 0 10 02 PBX 2 2 7 Trunk to Trunk Restriction e 8 2 TIE Routing Table PBX Code 951 No Leading Digits to Number to Trunk Group No Digi
108. Network ISDN is a hierarchy of digital switching and transmission systems ISDN transmits voice data and image in digital format It is synchronized so all digital elements speak the same language at the same speed ISDN Interface ISDN provides the following two interfaces Basic Rate Interface BRI BRI provides 2 B channels 64 kbps for each for data transmission and 1 D channel 16 kbps for signaling 2B D Primary Rate Interface PRI PRI provides 23 B channels 64 kbps for each for data transmission and 1 D channel 64 kbps for signaling 23B D System Hardware Requirements To interface the KX TD500 System with ISDN one of the following two trunk cards is required depending on the ISDN interface type KX TD50288 BRI Card for Basic Rate Interface KX TD50290 PRI23 Card for Primary Rate Interface Access Mode The KX TD500 System can handle calls from ISDN with Point to Point P P or Point to MultiPoint P MP access mode or both The PRI23 Card KX TD50290 is available for P P access mode only Point to Point P P access mode A call from ISDN with DID Direct Inward Dialing number is directed to a specific regular extension with DN or virtual extension with FDN directly after translation of the DID ISDN number DID Direct Inward Dialing ISDN Configuration TD500 I Ext 1112 DID 1111 ISDN Called No gt Ext 1212 DID 1112 555 1111 1113 gt Ext 1312 DID 1113
109. PR Version is 1 or later except TVS300 and whose LPR Version is 2 or later TVS300 only LPR version can be confirmed by System Programming lt Section 1 2 4 Card Properties DHLC ESLC DLC LPR Version in the Programming Guide gt e Itis programmable whether to create the mailboxes for extensions within only the tenant which has the VPS ports Jack No 1 or for extensions within all the tenants by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option VPS Auto Configuration Mode in the Programming Guide gt Programming Guide References e 1 2 Slot Assignment LPR Version e 2 8 System Option VPS Auto Configuration Mode e 5 10 VPS Integration Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Integration DPT Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT integration e g KX TVS100 Features Guide 19 General Features User Manual References Not applicable 20 Features Guide General Features Background Music BGM External Description Background Music BGM can be broadcast throughout the office via the external pagers The BGM through External Pagers can be turned on off by the Manager and the Operators Conditions Hardware Requirements It is required to connect a user supplied external pager Up to two pagers and up to two external
110. Panasonic KX TVS series VPS only Available features 1 Voice Mail VM Service Integration Allows the caller to leave a message in the mailbox of their destination party without knowing the mailbox number 2 Automated Attendant AA Service Integration Used to improve the call handling performance of the VPS 3 Special features for DPT Integration DPT Integration only Auto Configuration Live Call Screening LCS Two way Recording into the Voice Mail Two way Transfer 60 Features Guide General Features Outline sketch of VPS Integration Inband l Integration __ VM Service Integration Follow on ID AA Service Integration Call Status Code VPS Integration Automatic Configuration DPT Live Call Screening Integration Two Way Recording into the Voice Mail Two Way Transfer Conditions None Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References None User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 61 General Features Limited Call Duration Description Limited Call Duration is a system programmable feature that disconnects a CO call when a specified timer expires A warning tone is sent to the extension user 15 seconds 10 seconds and 5 seconds before the time limit Conditions Class of Service COS programming Limiting the call duration can b
111. Panasonic Telephone Systems A j oiceSonic Panasonic KX TD500 nis Ea Phone 877 289 2829 Digital Super Hybrid System Features Guide 0 KXTDS00 KX TD500 TD500 u Panasonic KX TD50 N Please read this manual before connecting the Digital Super Hybrid System and save this manual for future reference Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic Model KX TD500 Digital Super Hybrid System Introduction Introduction About this Features Guide This Features Guide is designed to serve as an overall features reference for the Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System KX TD500 It explains what the KX TD500 System can do and how to obtain the most out of its many features and capabilities Section 1 General Features Provides details about the general features Section 2 ISDN Features Provides details about the features required to use Public Switched Telephone Network ISDN services Section 3 TIE Line Features Provides details about the features required to use TIE line services Section 4 Tones Ring Tones Provides the list of tones and ring tones Section 5 Index Provides the feature titles important words and phrases to help you access the required information easily Note e Throughout this manual the term he or she his or her may be used In order to improve readability rather than continually use he she we have only used one of these terms The term he or she should be ta
112. Ringing Transfer Conditions e SDN button SDN button can be assigned to a flexible CO button on a DN type PT by Station User or System Programming e FWD DND Override The call transferred by this feature overrides FWD Call Forwarding DND Do Not Disturb feature assigned on the PDN owner extension e A call made by this feature rings the destination PDN button immediately even if delayed ringing or no ring has been set on that PDN button lt Section 2 2 9 PDN SDN Button Delayed Ringing Assignment gt e Ifthe owner extension is in the Station or User Programming mode Ringing Transfer does not function Programming Guide References e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key Features Guide References None User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 2 2 9 PDN SDN Button Delayed Ringing Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 68 Ringing Transfer Features Guide 265 General Features 1 12 Conversation Features Conference 3 Party Description The system supports 3 party conference calls which include outside or inside parties or both During a 2 party conversation the extension user can add a third party to their conversation thereby establishing a conference Conditions e Conference call arrangement A conference call can be one of the following three arrangements 1 inside and 2 outside 2 inside and 1 outside and 3 inside Conference trunk Up to eight conference cal
113. SLT an Analog Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone a single extension port b DPT SLT a Digital Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone a single extension port When a parallel connection is made an extension user can make and answer a call using either one of two telephones Conditions Hardware Requirements DHLC card KX TD50170 or HLC card KX T96170 is required to utilize this feature e To enable Paralleled Telephone mode set Parallel XDP to Parallel in the Extension Port Assignment screen lt Section 1 4 Extension Port Assignment in the Programming Guide gt e The corresponding PT user can activate or deactivate the paralleled SLT ringing by dialing the feature number for Parallel telephone mode e Paralleled Telephones APT SLT DPT SLT share the same extension number Extra Device Port XDP If EXtra Device Port feature DPT SLT is activated each telephone has its own unique extension number and acts as completely different extensions e The PT can be used to perform normal operations whether or not the SLT is enabled e Inthe DPT SLT combination if one telephone goes off hook while the other telephone is on a call the call is switched to the former e Inthe APT SLT combination if one telephone goes off hook while the other telephone is on a call a 3 party call is established If one user goes on hook the other user continues the call e When receiving a ca
114. SQX1494SA KK0899MN6113 M
115. Speed Dialing Initial display e 4 3 Extension Line Name e 4 7 ISDN Extension Line Name e 5 2 System Speed Dialing Tenant No Name Number Features Guide References 1 7 Dialing Features e One Touch Dialing e Station Speed Dialing e System Speed Dialing 1 17 Display Features e Special Display Features User Manual References e 2 2 17 Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment KX T7235 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 only e 3 2 2 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set e 3 2 3 002 System Speed Dialing Name Set 3 2 4 004 Extension Name Set e 4 5 8 KX T7235 Display Features Call Directory e 4 5 11 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Display Features Call Directory 332 Features Guide General Features Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Description Allows the KX T7436 and KX T7235 users to set or cancel the Call Forwarding and Do Not Disturb DND features using the display messages after pressing the FWD DND button Conditions None Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References 1 8 Ringing Features e Do Not Disturb DND 1 11 Transferring Features e Call Forwarding User Manual References e 4 5 2 Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb KX T7436 KX T7235 only Features Guide 333 General Features Call Log Incoming Description This is one of the Caller ID service features available for the following DPT extensions onl
116. System Programming e If one or more DHLC cards are installed after booting up the System with default values DN assignment should be done before performing XDP assignment Installation Manual References 2 4 13 Extra Device Port XDP Connection Programming Guide References e 1 4 Extension Port Assignment Parallel XDP DHLC card Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Paralleled Telephone User Manual References Not applicable 10 Features Guide General Features 1 2 System Administration System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer Description The KX TD500 system can be programmed and administered using a Personal Computer PC The Programming Guide is required to perform PC Programming There are two programming methods On Site Programming By connecting a PC to your system System Programming and maintenance can be performed locally There are two ways available to perform the above Method 1 Using the Serial Interface RS 232C port Connect the PC to the Serial Interface RS 232C port provided The Basic Shelf is provided with RS 232C Ports RS 232C Port 1 PROG is used for System Programming diagnostics and external system database storage Save Load functions and Port 2 SMDR for Station Message Detail Recording SMDR only Method 2 Using an internal modem Install the optional Remote Card RMT card KX T96196 or ERMT card KX TD50197 Connect an ex
117. System Speed Dialing entries already exist in your PBX they are overwritten by uploading the file caution The data file can be created by a text editor such as Notepad or Microsoft Excel and it must be in CSV comma separated value format Each speed dial data item must be a single line and fields values must be separated by a single comma The extension of the filename must be csv lt Format of the database file gt 1 0 12345 ABC Company 2 10 789 2 9 1 0 94771437 KME 214 Features Guide General Features lt Meaning of each field gt Field Contents Value Range 1 Tenant No 1 8 2 Entry No 0 999 3 Dial Up to 24 digits consisting of 0 9 P S or F 4 Name Up to 10 characters consisting of 0 9 A Z a z or the following marks amp lt gt Notes e Dial and Name can be omitted If both fields are blank the effect is to delete the entry in the PBX e There are limits to the number of entries per tenant and per system Hence if either limit is exceeded data lines will be ignored and will not be registered in the PBX e CSV format file can be uploaded in the interactive processing mode only Programming Guide References e 2 2 Tenant System Speed Dialing Entries Max System Speed Dial TRS Level Override e 2 3 Numbering Plan Speed Dialing System e 5 2 System Speed Dialing Name Number Fe
118. TIE Line Connection 376 TIE Line Features 369 370 395 Index TIE Line Network Alternate Routing 379 TIE Line Service 382 Timed Reminder Wake Up Call 222 Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call 225 Time Out Variable 101 Toll Restriction 183 Toll Restriction for Special Carrier Access 191 Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry 192 Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing 194 Traffic Measurement 14 Transferring Features 251 Trunk Access 195 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS 136 Trunk Busy Out 104 Trunk Connection Assignment Outgoing 199 Trunk Group 108 Trunk Route Control 110 Two Way Recording into the Voice Mail 283 U Uniform Call Distribution UCD 138 User Programming with Proprietary Telephone 15 V Volume Control Speaker Handset Receiver Headset Ringer 309 W Walking COS 200 Walking Station 111 396 Features Guide Index Features Guide 397 Panasonic Telephone Systems A y oiceSonic See More Panasonic www voicesonic com Phone 877 289 2829 Panasonic Manuals Copyright This manual is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co Ltd PCC You may print out this manual solely for internal use with this model Except above you may not reproduce this manual in any form in whole or part without the prior written consent of PCC and its licensee 2000 Panasonic Communications Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Printed in Japan P
119. UCD Setting Auto LOGOUT Mode UCD Setting Supervisor Extension UCD Setting LOGIN Monitor UCD Setting UCD Call Waiting 3 5 Incoming Group FDN Overflow Setting Destination Day Night Group Type FWD DND Mode Search Mode Calls to Empty Group UCD Setting Time Table No UCD Setting FWD No Answer UCD Setting Auto LOGOUT Mode UCD Setting Supervisor Extension UCD Setting UCD Call Waiting 3 6 OGM Group FDN OGM Type 4 2 Trunk Line Destination Day Night Lunch Break 4 3 Extension Line Group No Features Guide 151 General Features Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Extension Group e Incoming Group e Outgoing Message OGM 1 8 Ringing Features e Log In Log Out User Manual References e 4 3 80 UCD Login Monitor e 4 3 81 UCD Monitor Mode 152 Features Guide General Features 1 6 Originating Features Alternate Calling Ring Voice Description Allows an extension user either to ring signal Ring call or voice signal Voice call the other PT extensions Ring call The called PT rings Voice call The caller s voice is heard through the built in speaker of the called PT instead of ringing The calling extension user can switch ring signaling to voice signaling and vice versa by pressing during an intercom call Conditions e Mode Selection The PT user can select either to be ring signaled
120. Yes Intercept Routing starts All resources Is IRNA are busy employed Kept waiting with No a ringback tone Making an extension DISA IRNA Time One of the resources is operator call m SIRNA available Outgoing DISA IRNA Time employed Message is sent TAFAS Bein Yes No Dialing no digits Intercept Time after OGM Is IRNA employed The call is accepted ii Calling Intercept Routing starts Idle a modem j No Answer Making an Timer starts outside call Idle After 10 seconds Is User Code accepted or unnecessary l Yes The call is accepted Disconnected Conditions e The following items are required to utilize the DISA feature a An optional DISA Card KX T96191 must be installed Up to eight DISA cards can be installed in the system b The FDN of the OGM Group number should be assigned as the DIL 1 1 destination This assigns the DISA line and the message accessed by external callers Features Guide 129 General Features 130 c The DISA OGM s should be recorded by the Manager or an Operator d The OGM Type should be set to DISA under OGM Group setting DISA Delayed Answer Time A DISA call is answered after a ringback tone is returned to the caller after the DISA Delayed Answer T
121. aling the feature number This tone can be eliminated by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 9 Confirmation tone for Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Answer Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve in the Programming Guide gt e The extension user cannot retrieve the following calls Unattended Conference Calls Calls held at the System Call Parking Area Calls put on Exclusive Call Hold Programming Guide References e 2 2 Tenant Music on Hold Source e 2 3 Numbering Plan Hold Hold Retrieve Station Hold Retrieve Trunk Call Waiting Set Cancel e 2 5 System Timer Hold Recall Time e 2 8 System Option Confirmation tone for Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Answer Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Music on Hold 1 10 Holding Features e Call Park 1 13 Audible Tone Features e Hold Recall User Manual References e 4 3 11 Call Hold e 4 3 17 Call Waiting 246 Features Guide General Features Call Park Description Allows the extension user to place a call on hold into a system parking area so that any extension user can retrieve the call This releases the user from the parked call to perform other operations Conditions e Up to 800 calls can be parked at the same time in the system Tenant Service If Tenant Service is employed each tenant can use up to 100 parking areas 00 99
122. all by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold This feature can be activated or deactivated by dialing the appropriate feature number Conditions e The Call Waiting tone is generated at the busy extension which is engaged in a call extension outside conference when an outside call or a doorphone call comes in on the busy extension or when another extension caller executes Busy Station Signaling BSS to the busy extension e Call Waiting Tone Selection For PT users two types of call waiting tones shown below are provided to prevent them from missing the tone A Call Waiting Tone type can be selected either by Station or System Programming Tone 1 Default 15s e I Intercom l Outside Call UUN N ULIN 5s Tone 2 aaa Outside Call l Intercom Call Features Guide 233 General Features BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA If an extension user dials 1 while hearing a busy tone BSS or OHCA or Whisper OHCA may be activated at the called extension This is determined by the following conditions Calling extension Called extension Call Waiting setting COS OHCA OFF ON assignment 0 1 2 3 Disable BSS BSS BSS W OHCA Enable BSS OHCA BSS _OHCA_BSS OHCA Off Hook Call Announcement is activated when the called extension is KX T7130 KX T7235 or KX T7436 Whisper OHCA is activated when both calling and called exte
123. an enter a pre assigned account code to override toll restriction Option mode An extension user can enter any account code if needed For Incoming CO Calls Account code entry is optional Conditions 16 e Up to 1000 account codes per system can be assigned by System Programming These account codes are required when extension users in Verified All Calls mode or Verified Toll Restriction Override mode make outgoing CO calls e Tenant Service If Tenant Service is employed the affiliation of each account code is determined by System Programming e SMDR The account code is appended to the Station Message Detail Recording SMDR call record When two or more different account codes are entered during a single call it is possible to select whether SMDR prints out the first entered account code or the last entered account code by System Programming lt Section 10 4 SMDR Print out Account Code in the Programming Guide gt e Memory Dialing An account code can be stored into Memory Dialing System Station Speed Dialing One Touch Dialing e Account code entry after CPC detection Should be done within 15 seconds Otherwise call record is appended to SMDR call record and entry becomes impossible afterwards Features Guide General Features TRS Level Each account code is appended with unique TRS Level for Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry feature Emergency numbers Regardless of the Accou
124. an idle line is automatically selected from the pre assigned lines b No Line Preference No line is selected when an extension user goes off hook to make a call He must select an appropriate Line Access button to make a call c Prime Line Preference default When an extension user goes off hook to make a call a pre programmed prime line is selected automatically A Prime Line can be selected from the following line access buttons lt ICM type PT gt ICM S CO G CO L CO lt DN type PT gt PDN SDN S CO G CO L CO Conditions e This feature is available when there is no incoming call on the extension or when the extension has set No Line Preference for incoming calls that is Line Preference Incoming overrides Line Preference Outgoing e Setting a new line preference feature cancels the previous setting e The CO lines available for extension users must be assigned by System Programming Line Preference Override The extension user can override the Idle Prime Line Preference temporarily by pressing the desired line access button INTERCOM CO or DN PDN SDN before going off hook or if Full One Touch Dialing is enabled press One Touch Dialing DSS REDIAL or SAVE button Programming Guide References e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key Preferred Line Outgoing Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Trunk Connection Assignment Outgoing 172 Features Guide General Features User Ma
125. and get another line for making a call without hanging up Flash Sends a flash signal to the Central Office or host PBX to access their features External Feature Access Function Used to perform the displayed function operation FWD DND Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Used to set or cancel Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb feature HOLD Used to place a call on hold INTERCOM Used to make or receive intercom calls Jog Dial Used to adjust the volume of the handset receiver headset ringer and speaker It also adjusts the display contrast Please refer to Section 1 1 5 Initial Setting for KX T7400 Series in the User Manual For KX T7431 KX T7433 and KX T7436 users it is also used to select data from the Call Directory and the System Feature Access Menu MESSAGE Used to send a message indication to another extension and confirm and call back the message sender MODE Used to shift the display in order to access various features During the Station Speed Dialing Number Name assignment this button is used to enter the name assignment mode MONITOR Used for hands free dialing operation PAUSE Used to insert a pause in a System Speed Dialing Station Speed Dialing One Touch Dialing number With an APT this button can also be used as the PROGRAM button PF Programmable Feature These flexible buttons can be programmed to be a One Touch Dialing FWD DND SAVE Account CONF Conference Answer or R
126. andset receiver volume Headset volume Ringer volume Speaker volume Conditions e The control method depends on the telephone type KX T7400 series DPTs Rotate the Jog Dial in the desired direction KX T7200 series DPTs Press the volume control button UP A DOWN V to select a desired volume level However the ringer volume of KX T7220 and KX T7250 is selected with Ringer Volume Selector OFF LOW HIGH APTs Slide the following levers located on the left side of the telephone Volume Control MIN MAX Handset Headset Volume Selector NORMAL MID HIGH Ringer Volume Selector OFF LOW HIGH Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References None User Manual References e 1 1 5 Initial Setting for KX T7400 Series e 1 1 6 Initial Setting for KX T7200 Series Features Guide 309 General Features 1 16 Button Features Button Direct Station Selection DSS Description DSS button permits the PT user one touch access to other extension users Conditions e A DSS button can be assigned to a flexible CO DSS button on a PT by Station User or System Programming e Busy Lamp Field Once a button is assigned as a DSS button it provides Busy Lamp Field BLF status Programming Guide References e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key Features Guide References 1 11 Transferring Features e One Touch Transfer 1 15 Propri
127. ary depending on a type of applications Please refer to the following features in this section for further information about each application programming Outside CO Line and TIE Line Connection TIE Line and Outside CO Line Connection TIE Line and TIE Line Connection TIE Line Network Alternate Routing Installation Manual References 2 5 4 T1 Digital Trunk Card KX T96187 2 5 7 PRI23 Card KX TD50290 Programming Guide References 386 1 2 Slot Assignment 1 6 T1 Port Assignment Channel Type Group No 1 9 PRI Port Assignment Type Group No 2 3 Numbering Plan TIE Line Access Other PBX 01 Other PBX 16 2 5 System Timer TIE Inter digit Time 4 2 Trunk Line Group No Incoming Type DID TIE Digits to delete DID TIE Number to be added Start Signal Type 4 3 Extension Line CLIP Number Public CLIP Number Private 4 7 ISDN Extension Line CLIP Number Public CLIP Number Private Features Guide TIE Line Features Features Guide References 1 11 Transferring Features e Call Transfer User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 387 TIE Line Features 388 Features Guide Section 4 Tones Ring Tones Features Guide 389 Tone Ring Tone Tone Patterns Confirmation Tone 1 Confirmation Tone 2 Confirmation Tone 3 Confirmation Tone 4 Dial Tone 1 Dial Tone 2 Dial Tone 3
128. ation Manual gt Conditions e The default setting for each programming item is listed in Section 12 Default Values in the Programming Guide Installation Manual References e 2 10 2 CPU Rotary Switch Features Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References None User Manual References Not applicable 96 Features Guide General Features T1 Carrier Description The T1 line is at the bottom of the digital transmission hierarchy A T1 line carries 1 544 Mbps of data which can be voice or anything else The T1 line contains 24 voice channels Voice is digitized by Pulse Code Modulation Conditions Hardware Requirements T1 Digital Trunk card KX T96187 and user supplied CSU Channel Service Unit are required to utilize T1 carrier with the KX TD500 System e Trunk Interface This card supports five different trunk interfaces to provide desired connection at minimum expense One of the following five trunk types can be assigned to one of 24 channels of T1 card individually according to tariffs and customer needs LCO GCO DID OPX TIE E amp M e Up to eight T1 cards 192 ports can be installed in the system One T1 card occupies 24 trunk ports e The T1 card needs to be installed to free slot no 1 5 or 9 e Physical port number for each T1 trunk channel is as follows Slot No Channel Port No 1 1 24ch X0101 X0124 5 1 24ch X0501 X0524 9 1 24c
129. atures Guide General Features Power Failure Re Start Description When turning back on the electricity the system re starts the stored data automatically Before re starting the system records the error log if necessary Conditions e Memory Protection In the event of a power failure system memory is protected by a factory provided lithium battery Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References 1 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics e Power Failure Transfer User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 115 General Features Power Failure Transfer Description Power Failure Transfer connects specific telephones any SLT to the pre determined CO lines in the event of system power failure Conditions e Upto 192 pairs of extension CO connection are available to maintain a conversation when power is restored or TSW is recovering e Auxiliary Connection between the Trunk card and the Extension card should be done as per System Programming so that conversation is maintained when the power is restored or TSW is recovering e KX TD500 System changes the current connection to the Auxiliary connection automatically when the power supply stops e DC Power Source If DC power is available by the backup batteries even if the AC power fails the KX TD500 System will not change the current connection to the Auxiliary connection Installation Manual Refere
130. atures Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing 1 17 Display Features e Call Directory User Manual References e 3 2 2 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set e 3 2 3 002 System Speed Dialing Name Set e 4 3 73 System Speed Dialing e 4 3 77 Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing Features Guide 215 General Features 1 8 Ringing Features Do Not Disturb DND Description Allows the extension user to appear busy to an incoming CO or extension calls Conditions DND does not work for the following calls Hold Recall Timed Reminder Alarm Tone Calls directed by Intercept Routing Do Not Disturb Override An extension in DND mode can be called by other extension users who are allowed to override DND in their Class of Service e An extension user may have only one type of Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb feature in effect at any time If one of Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb feature is assigned another does not function but the assignment itself is preserved for future use The extension user can choose either one by pressing the FWD DND button while on hook In this case pressing the button changes the settings as follows aes gt FWD S The lighting patterns of the FWD DND button are as follows Off Both functions are canceled Redon DND mode This setting can be changed Red flash FWD mode by System Program
131. basis Security Mode Description Non Security DISA callers can make both outside and intercom calls without restriction Trunk Security DISA callers are required to enter a pre assigned DISA user code to make outside calls All Security DISA callers are required to enter a pre assigned DISA user code to make both outside and intercom calls Outgoing Message OGM can be recorded for the DISA feature When a caller reaches the system via DISA line a pre recorded message will greet the caller DISA OGMs may be recorded by the Manager extension or an Operator Warning for the Direct Inward System Access Users When you enable the CO to CO Line Call feature of Direct Inward System Access DISA function if a third party discovers the password a DISA User Code of the system you have a risk that they will make illegal phone calls using your telephone line and the cost may be charged to your account In order to avoid this problem we strongly recommend the following points 1 Carefully maintain the secrecy of the password 2 Specify a complicated password as long and random as you can make it 3 Change the password frequently 128 Features Guide General Features Flow chart of possible cases and results for DISA calls An outside call is initiated i The DISA Delayed Timer starts i The caller reaches the DISA line
132. be connected to a PT In total up to 64 DSS Consoles can be installed in the system The paired PT user can carry out the following operations simply by pressing buttons on the DSS Console which were pre programmed as function buttons e Direct access to an extension Direct Station Selection e Quick access to an outside party One Touch Dialing e Easy transfer of an outside call to an extension The programmable One Touch Transfer feature provides simplified operation e Quick access to a system feature A DSS Console has two types of buttons as shown below Example DSS Console KX T7240 I DSS buttons PF buttons Features Guide General Features DSS Direct Station Selection buttons Used to call a corresponding extensions with One Touch Every button is provided with an indicator Busy Lamp Field which shows the current status of the corresponding extension as shown in the following table Busy Lamp Field Table Light Status of extension Off Idle On Busy Flash Logout If the DSS button is corresponded with a DN type PT the DSS indicator turns on when at least one PDN button on the corresponding DN type PT becomes busy If the extension corresponding with the DSS button is in Logout status and idle the DSS indicator flashes in red To meet the user s variou
133. ber Public lt Section 4 3 Extension Line in the Programming Guide gt e CLIP Numbers for ISDN BRI Lines When an extension user makes an outside call using an ISDN BRI line the number stored in DN lt Section 1 2 9 Card Properties BRI SPID DN in the Programming Guide gt is displayed on the telephone of the other party as the CLIP number e The CLIP service for outgoing CO calls can be restricted by dialing the feature number for CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction e The number actually sent to the calling or called party may be different from the system programming number It depends on the contract with your ISDN service provider ISDN Public Switched Telephone Network This feature applies to the calls over the ISDN Public Switched Telephone Network e Hardware Requirements To utilize this feature a BRI card KX TD50288 or a PRI23 card KX TD50290 is required Installation Manual References e 2 5 6 BRI Card KX TD50288 e 2 5 7 PRI23 Card KX TD50290 356 Features Guide ISDN Features Programming Guide References 1 2 Slot Assignment 1 8 BRI Port Assignment 1 9 PRI Port Assignment 2 3 Numbering Plan CLIP 4 2 Trunk Line Subscriber 4 3 Extension Line CLIP Number Public 4 7 ISDN Extension Line CLIP Number Public Features Guide References 2 2 ISDN Originating Features e Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR User Manual References 4 3 19 Calling Line Identificat
134. ble for ISDN BRI line only e What if the dialing digits received is not enough to decide the call destination If the number of digits received is less than the number which is programmed in Digit to receive DID reorder tone is sent to the caller or the call is redirected to the IRNA destination IRNA feature This is determined by System Programming e What if the call destination is busy If the destination of an MDN call is in busy status the caller may hear a busy tone or the call is redirected to the IRNA destination or the call waits until the destination becomes idle This is determined by System Programming Installation Manual References 366 e 2 5 6 BRI Card KX TD50288 Features Guide ISDN Features Programming Guide References e 1 8 BRI Port Assignment e 2 8 System Option Destination Busy DID Illegal Number DID e 3 2 Trunk Group Intercept Destination Day Night e 4 2 Trunk Line Incoming Type DID TIE Digits to delete DID TIE Number to be added Digit to receive DID e 4 3 Extension Line Intercept Destination Day Night e 9 2 DID Dial Registration DID MDN No Features Guide References 2 1 ISDN Features e Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 367 ISDN Features 368 Features Guide TIE Line Features Section 3 TIE Line Features Features Guide 369 TIE
135. button on the KX T7441 DSS Console For other PTs and DSS Consoles these buttons can be assigned to a flexible CO DSS PF button by Station User or System Programming What if the ANSWER button is pressed during a call If a new call comes in while engaged in the current call the extension user can answer it simply by pressing the ANSWER button In this case the current call will be disconnected Call Answering Priorities If the ANSWER button is pressed when two or more calls are ringing on an extension at a time the extension will be connected to one of them according to the following priorities 1 BSS Busy Station Signaling calls 2 Line Preference 3 In the order of arrival Delayed Ringing or No Ringing Calls If a call which comes in on the extension is not ringing Delayed Ringing or No Ring it cannot be answered by pressing the ANSWER button Programming Guide References 4 3 Extension Line CO Key PF Key 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key PF Key Features Guide References None Features Guide 227 General Features User Manual References 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 4 ANSWER and RELEASE buttons Operation e 5 2 26 ANSWER and RELEASE Buttons Operation 228 Features Guide General Features Answering Direct Trunk Description Allows the PT user to answer an incoming CO call simply by directly pressing a flashing CO butt
136. called extension hears a beep tone and the caller hears a confirmation tone Conditions e AUTO ANSWER MUTE Button Hands free answerback mode can be turned on off by pressing the AUTO ANSWER MUTE button This feature does not work for the following calls CO calls Doorphone calls Calls to an Extension Group Calls to an Incoming Group Calls to a Phantom button Calls from a VM Voice Mail extension Calls ringing on an SDN button e Alternate Calling Ring Voice Mode Override Hands free Answerback set on a telephone overrides Alternate Calling Ring Voice preset on the extension Hands free conversation mode is established immediately after a confirmation tone is sent e Itis programmable whether or not to answer the intercom call on Consultation Hold automatically by System Programming Programming Guide References e 2 8 System Option Auto Answer with held call Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Alternate Calling Ring Voice User Manual References 4 3 40 Hands free Answerback 238 Features Guide General Features Line Preference Incoming No Line Prime Line Ringing Line Description A PT user can select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following three line preferences a No Line Preference No line is selected when an extension user goes off hook to answer a call He must press a desired Line Access button to answer an incomi
137. cccsccscssesccesesscsescccescccesccessccsssscssseseesseses 362 Direct Inward Dialing DID ee cece ccseceeeeeceeeeeeeeeesaeeeaaeceneceeeeeeeaeeeeaaeceaeeceeeeees 362 Multiple Directory Number MDN Ringing Service ueeesnessnsanessnenseennneenennnnnn 365 TIE Line Features 309 TIE Line Features wi cisscccceseccesssssssssetsosonascooasecanseencsesnssesevacdecesecensccesseosvasonessseonesseaseducs 370 Outside CO Line and TIE Line Connection eseesessnssssssnessnnnnsennnnenennnnnnnnnnnn 370 TIE Line and Outside CO Line Connection eeesssseeessssneensnsneensnsneennnnnnnennnsn nennen 374 TIE Line and TIE Line Connection onaniaa aa aa T 376 TIE Line Network Alternate Routing 0 eee cee eseeescecneceeeeeseeeaeeseeeeaeecaaesaeeeseeeaes 379 TIE Eine SENICE Mereana EEA EE EES T S EATE 382 Tones Ring Tones sssssocecsssooccesessoocecessscocecsssooccesessooeecssssesseessss JDI DIN ers 3 Features Guide General Features Section 1 General Features Features Guide 9 General Features 1 1 System Expansion EXtra Device Port XDP Description A DPT and an SLT can be connected to the same extension port but have different extension numbers so that they can act as completely different extensions Conditions e Hardware Requirements DHLC card KX TD50170 is required to utilize this feature e XDP requires previous programming of the extension port Enable XDP mode for the desired port by
138. ccess code alone does not change the memorized number Saved Number SAVE button If the SAVE button is not provided on your PT it is possible to assign a flexible button CO DSS PF to the SAVE button by Station User or System Programming Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Redial e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key PF Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key PF Key Features Guide 211 General Features Features Guide References 1 16 Button Features Button Flexible User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 2 2 4 Full One Touch Dialing Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 66 Redial 212 Features Guide General Features Station Speed Dialing Description Allows the extension user to store frequently dialed numbers up to 24 digits in order to place a call with abbreviated dialing for personal use Up to 10 station speed dialing numbers appended with 1 digit station speed dialing code 0 9 can be stored in each telephone Conditions e Station Speed Dialing numbers and names can be assigned by Station or System Programming Station Speed Dialing name assignment is available for KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 and KX T7235 only e Station Speed Dialing can be followed by manual dialing to supplement the dialed digits Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Speed Dialing Station Speed Dialing Stati
139. ch group can include up to 72 extensions or Extension Groups or both Conditions e A single extension can be assigned to up to eight different DIL 1 N Groups at a time e Delayed Ringing When an outside call directed to a DIL 1 N Group comes in all extensions in the group ring immediately by default This setting can be changed to delayed ringing or no ring on each DIL 1 N Group member extension or Extension Group basis Programming Guide References e 3 5 Incoming Group Group Type Destinations DN Destinations Ringing Type e 4 2 Trunk Line Incoming Type Destination Day Night Lunch Break Features Guide References 1 13 Audible Tone Features e Ringing Delayed User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 27 General Features Door Opener Description Allows the extension users to unlock the door for a visitor from their extensions The door can be unlocked by extension users assigned as the destination of doorphone calls anytime by dialing the appropriate feature number However during a doorphone call any extension user can open the door from their extensions by dialing 5 to let the visitor in Conditions e Hardware Requirements It is necessary to install a DPH Card KX T96161 and a user supplied door opener on each door to be opened Up to eight door openers can be installed in the system Installation Manual References e 2 7 3 DPH Card KX T96161 Programmi
140. d DN type PT Secondary A copy of the other extension s PDN button Acts as a proxy of the owner Directory PDN button SDN button reflects the status of the PDN button of the owner Number SDN _ extension Incoming calls to the PDN of owner extension also appears on the SDN button Assignable for a DN type PT only All PTs in the system can be categorized as lt ICM type PT gt or lt DN type PT gt lt ICM type PT gt default ICM button CO buttons All PTs in the system have one ICM button and one L CO button by default lt DN type PT gt DN button s CO buttons If at least one PDN button is assigned on a PT it functions as a DN type PT In this case ICM button on a PT does not function 314 Features Guide General Features Conditions General e Ringing Tone Selection DPT only A ringing tone type for CO S CO G CO L CO and DN PDN SDN buttons can be selected either by Station or System Programming CO General e CO Button Assignment flexible CO A CO button S CO G CO L CO can be assigned to a flexible CO button on a PT by Station User or System Programming CO Button Assignment flexible DSS A G CO S CO button can also be assigned to a flexible DSS button on a DSS console These buttons are available for monitoring the call activity only not available for making or receiving a call e Priority of CO Call Indication ICM type PT It is possible to assign S CO G CO and L CO buttons on a PT
141. d below when the SP PHONE MONITOR button indicator is off SP PHONE button MONITOR button INTERCOM button CO button DN button The hands free mode is canceled if nothing is dialed within 10 seconds PT with MONITOR button The PT with MONITOR button can be used for hands free dialing operations etc but cannot be used for a hands free conversation Full One Touch Dialing A single press of a One Touch Dialing button DSS button REDIAL button or a SAVE button also provides the hands free mode if Full One Touch Dialing is activated Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Full One Touch Dialing User Manual References 278 4 3 38 Full One Touch Dialing 4 3 41 Hands free Operation Features Guide General Features Off Hook Monitor Description Allows a PT user on a handset call to let other people around him monitor the call by pressing the SP PHONE button Conditions e This feature is available for the following PT extensions only KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 e Ifthe SP PHONE button is pressed during a handset call either Off Hook Monitor or SP PHONE mode hands free mode will be established This is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 20 Off hook Monitor in the Programming Guide gt e Making an OHCA call is not available if the other extension is in Off Hook Monitor
142. d to a specific destination in program 9 2 DID Dial Registration Assign the Destination in program 4 2 Trunk Line Conditions None 352 Features Guide ISDN Features Installation Manual References e 2 5 6 BRI Card KX TD50288 e 2 5 7 PRI23 Card KX TD50290 Programming Guide References e 1 2 Slot Assignment e 1 8 BRI Port Assignment e 1 9 PRI Port Assignment e 4 2 Trunk Line Incoming Type Destination Day Night Lunch Break DID TIE Digits to delete DID TIE Number to be added Digit to receive DID e 9 2 DID Dial Registration DID MDN No Features Guide References 2 3 ISDN Attended Features e Direct Inward Dialing DID e Multiple Directory Number MDN Ringing Service User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 353 ISDN Features Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Extension Description The KX TD500 System supports the connection of Terminal Equipment with separate power supplies For example ISDN telephones G4 Facsimiles and Personal Computers which are connected to an ISDN SO bus on a BRI Basic Rate Interface card KX TD50288 a PRI23 Primary Rate Interface card KX TD50290 A maximum of eight Terminal Equipment can be connected to each ISDN SO bus with Point to Multipoint configuration However only up to two Terminal Equipment on the same SO bus can be used simultaneously Each Terminal Equipment can be
143. de General Features 1 11 Transferring Features e Intercept Routing User Manual References e 3 2 10 010 DISA TIE User Code Set e 4 3 26 Direct Inward System Access DISA e 4 4 6 Outgoing Message OGM Record Playback Features Guide 133 General Features Ring Group Description Allows both extension and outside users to ring all extensions in a Ring Group simultaneously by dialing the Floating Directory Number FDN of the Ring Group This feature is useful for talking to or transferring calls to anyone in the same group This feature can be categorized as follows Extension Group Ring Group can be made up by assigning the group type of an Extension Group as Ring Up to 128 Ring Groups each consisting of more than one extension in the same tenant can be created in the system Incoming Group Ring Group can be made up by assigning the group type of an Incoming Group as Ring Up to 96 Ring Groups can be created in the system Conditions 134 e Types of calls whose destination can be the Ring Group are Call Type Outside calls Direct In Line DIL Direct Inward Dialing DID Direct Inward Dialing DID ISDN Direct Inward System Access DISA Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA Multiple Directory Number MDN TIE Uniform Call Distribution UCD Overflow Intercom calls Extension Transfer Features Guide General Features Programming
144. de 249 General Features 1 12 Conversation Features e Conference 3 Party e Conference 5 Party e Conference Unattended User Manual References Not applicable 250 Features Guide General Features 1 11 Transferring Features Call Forwarding Description Allows you to have incoming calls to your extension forwarded to a specified destination You may specify the circumstances under which your calls are forwarded The following Call Forwarding features are available Type Circumstance Destination All Calls Any time regardless of the status of your extension Busy When your extension is busy No Answer When you do not answer the call within a pre determined time Busy No Answer When your extension is busy or you do A specified extension not answer the call within a pre determined time Follow Me When you forget to set forwarding All Calls before you leave your desk you can set the same function from the destination extension To CO TIE Line Any time No Answer to CO When you do not answer the call within A Specified outside party TIE Line a pre determined time Conditions General e Types of calls which are forwarded by these features are Call Type Outside calls Direct In Lines DIL 1 1 Direct Inward Dialing DID Direct Inward Dialing DID ISDN Direct Inward System Access DISA Intercept Routing Multiple Directory Numb
145. de gt Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Station Lock Set Cancel e 2 8 System Option Special dial tone after setting feature e 4 3 Extension Line Station Lock Password Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Remote Station Lock Control User Manual References 4 3 30 Electronic Station Lockout 4 4 9 Remote Station Lock Control 166 Features Guide General Features Emergency Call Description Allows any extension user to dial out a pre assigned emergency number after seizing a CO line regardless of the restrictions imposed on the extension Conditions e Upto 10 emergency numbers such as 911 emergency services can be stored The number 911 is already stored at the factory by default e Making an emergency call is allowed even in the following cases in Account Code Verified All Calls Toll Restriction Override mode in any toll restriction level in Electronic Station Lockout Remote Station Lock e Ifthe KX TD500 System is connected to a host PBX as a behind PBX the extension user must dial the host PBX line access code after dialing the line access code and it must be included as the first digit of the emergency number Programming Guide References e 5 4 Emergency Dial Code Features Guide References None User Manual References e 4 3 31 Emergency Call Features Guide 167 General Features Executive Busy Override Descrip
146. dem by sending the pre assigned AT Commands Conditions e To connect an external modem to your system perform the following procedures 1 Connect the modem to the system with the Serial Interface RS 232C cable 2 Connect the modem to an extension port which is assigned as the DIL 1 1 destination Or connect the CO line directly to the modem 3 Set the power switch of the modem to ON then the modem will be initialized with the default values 4 The following AT Commands settings may be required for the modem e The Data Terminal Ready DTR signal should be ignored e The Data Terminal Equipment DTE Modem flow control should be turned off e The data compression should be disabled e Error Correction is not necessary Notes Not all modems will be compatible Please contact the Panasonic Bulletin Board System BBS at 201 271 3346 for a list of recommended modems e Please refer to the modem instructions as the AT Commands depend on the manufacturer of your model RS 232C Port 1 lt To PBX extension or CO line Modem Serial Interface 25 pin RS 232C 32 Features Guide General Features e The connection chart for the external modem 25 pin is as follows Serial Interface RS 232C port on the main unit Serial Interface RS 232C port on the modem Signal Pin Signal Name No Name SD TXD RD RXD RD RXD 3 SD TXD DSR DSR
147. der from the lowest to the highest trunk port physical number Busy lines are skipped of course e Tenant Service If Tenant Service is employed the affiliation of each trunk group is determined by System Programming 108 Features Guide General Features Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Trunk Group Access e 2 4 Class of Service COS e 2 7 Tr e 32Tr Trunk Group Setting unk to Trunk Restriction unk Group Intercept Destination Day Night Pause Time before Flash Signal Max Dial No after EFA Signal Line Hunting Order Tenant No Flash Time Disconnecting Time Pause Time PBX Access Code Numbering Plan ID Outgoing Public Numbering Plan ID Outgoing Private Numbering Plan ID Incoming Public Numbering Plan ID Incoming Private PBX Dial Tone PBX Ringback Tone Type of Number Outgoing Public Type of Number Outgoing Private Type of Number Incoming Public Type of Number Incoming Private Cyclic Signal Detection Continuous Signal Detection Silence Detection ISDN Progress Tone Mode IRNA for TIE Line Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Trunk Access User Manual Re Not appli Features Guide ferences cable 109 General Features Trunk Route Control Description Allows the Manager and the Operators to make a call using a specific trunk They can verify the status of the specified trunk Conditions e Exec
148. e CO Key Preferred Line Outgoing Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Trunk Group 1 6 Originating Features e Automatic Callback Busy Camp On e Automatic Route Selection ARS e Trunk Connection Assignment Outgoing 1 16 Button Features Button Line Access User Manual References 198 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment 2 2 12 Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 4 3 54 Outward Dialing Trunk Access Features Guide General Features Trunk Connection Assignment Outgoing Description Used to determine the Trunk Group which can be accessed by an extension user for making outside calls on a Class of Service basis This feature is useful to prevent unauthorized toll calls Conditions e When the extension user tries to make an outside call on a disallowed Trunk Group a reorder tone is sent to indicate that the user cannot use it e Night Service Trunk Groups available for each Class of Service can be determined for Day and Night respectively Programming Guide References e 2 4 Class of Service COS Trunk Group Setting Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Line Preference Outgoing Idle Line No Line Prime Line e Trunk Access User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 199 General Features Walking COS Description Allows an extension user to make a toll call at other lower lev
149. e e 4 3 Extension Line COS No Primary COS No Secondary e 4 7 ISDN Extension Line COS No Primary COS No Secondary 5 4 Emergency Dial Code e 5 7 Special Carrier Code e 6 2 TRS Deny Code e 6 3 TRS Exception Code Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Toll Restriction for Special Carrier Access e Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry e Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing User Manual References Not applicable 190 Features Guide General Features Toll Restriction for Special Carrier Access Description If your system has access to multiple telephone companies access to a specific company requires a carrier access code preceding the telephone number Toll Restriction on these calls is activated by storing the carrier codes maximum 100 Ifa stored carrier code is found in the dialed number a toll restriction check starts for the succeeding telephone number Conditions Automatic Pause Insertion A carrier access code is followed by Automatic Pause Insertion It is possible to select the pause time by System Programming Programming Guide References e 3 2 Trunk Group Pause Time e 5 7 Special Carrier Code Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Toll Restriction User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 191 General Features Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry Description
150. e Voice Mail Port When default 1 Ringback Tone The extension dialed is ringing 2 Busy Tone The extension dialed is busy Features Guide 45 General Features Integration Code Call Status Code Table Code default Call Status Sent to the Voice Mail Port When 3 Reorder Tone An invalid extension number is dialed or the call is inadvertently connected to another Voice Mail port also heard when no DTMF receiver is available to the Voice Mail extension DND Tone The extension dialed has set DND Do Not Disturb feature Extension Answer The extension dialed is answered Forwarded to Voice Mail Ringing The extension dialed is forwarded to Voice Mail and another Voice Mail port is able to answer This lets the first Voice Mail port usually an Automated Attendant send the call to the other Voice Mail ports Forwarded to Voice Mail Busy The extension dialed is forwarded to Voice Mail and no other Voice Mail ports are available to accept the call This signals the Voice Mail port usually an Automated Attendant to let the caller leave a message Forwarded to Ext Ringing The extension dialed is forwarded to another non Voice Mail extension Confirmation Tone The Message Waiting Lamp On or Message Waiting Lamp Off code is dialed successfully 9 Extension Disconnection The caller disconnects The central office must
151. e a voice announcement to many people at the same time Your message is announced over the built in speakers of Proprietary Telephones PTs or external speakers External Pagers or both The paged person can answer your page from a nearby telephone Paging Answer Making and answering a page is possible from either aPT or SLT You can do paging with a call on hold in order to transfer the call Paging and Transfer Type Paging method All Paged through all built in speakers of the PTs and from all external pagers simultaneously External Paged through all or specific external pagers Group Paged through the built in speakers of the PTs in all or specific paging groups Allows the PT user to deny receiving a paging announcement through the built in speaker of his own PT Paging Deny Conditions General e A confirmation tone is sent to extensions when the page is made Eliminating the tone is programmable lt Section 2 2 Tenant Confirmation Tone for Station or External Paging in the Programming Guide gt e A confirmation tone is sent to extensions when the page is answered Eliminating the tone is programmable lt Section 2 8 System Option 9 Confirmation tone for Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Answer Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve in the Programming Guide gt All External e An external pager user supplied must be connected to the System beforehand Up to two external pag
152. e activated or deactivated on a COS basis for each extension by System Programming lt Section 2 4 Class of Service COS Time Limit of Outside Calls in the Programming Guide gt Extension to CO Line Call Any outside call except CO to CO line call is limited by this feature For CO to CO line calls CO to CO Line Call Duration Time is activated This feature applies to the following calls a Ordinary CO calls b Calls forwarded by Call Forwarding to Trunk feature c Calls transferred by Call Transfer to Trunk feature Outgoing CO calls only or both This feature may apply to outgoing CO calls only or both outgoing and incoming CO calls This is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 5 Limited call duration in the Programming Guide gt Programming Guide References 2 4 Class of Service COS Time Limit of Outside Calls 2 5 System Timer Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time 2 8 System Option Limited call duration Features Guide References 1 11 Transferring Features e Call Forwarding Call Transfer 1 12 Conversation Features e Conference Unattended Determined by COS of the extension who initiated the feature 62 Features Guide General Features User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 63 General Features Lockout Description If one party in a conversation goes on hook they both are disconnected from the speech
153. e after setting feature in the Programming Guide gt Installation Manual References e 2 8 1 External Pager Paging Equipment Programming Guide References e 2 2 Tenant External Paging Tone Confirmation Tone for Station or External Paging e 2 3 Numbering Plan External Paging External Paging Answer TAFAS Answer Station Paging Station Paging Answer Paging Deny Set Cancel e 2 8 System Option Confirmation tone for Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Answer Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve Special dial tone after setting feature e 3 4 Paging Group Paging Group No Extension Group No Features Guide References None 294 Features Guide General Features User Manual References e 4 3 55 Paging e 4 3 56 Paging Answer e 4 3 57 Paging Deny e 4 3 58 Paging and Transfer Features Guide 295 General Features 1 15 Proprietary Telephone Features Background Music BGM Description Allows the PT user in on hook status to listen to Background Music BGM from the built in speaker of his PT Conditions e Hardware Requirements A user supplied external music source such as a radio is required to utilize this feature Up to two music sources can be connected to the system e Tenant Service If Tenant Service is utilized a music source for BGM is determined by System Programming on a tenant basis e Turning on off This feature can be turned
154. e available the Trunk Group hunting sequence is determined by System Programming lt 2 6 Local Hunt Sequence in the Programming Guide gt e For ICM type PT only Dialing the CO line access code default 9 selects a CO button on a PT according to the priority as follows S CO gt G CO gt L CO on a hunted Trunk Group Direct e By pressing an idle CO button the hands free operation mode is established and the extension user can perform On Hook Dialing There is no need to press the SP PHONE button MONITOR button or lift the handset Individual Trunk e ARS Override If Automatic Route Selection ARS is activated it is overridden by an outgoing call made by pressing the S CO button Trunk Group e Line Hunting Order An idle CO line in a Trunk Group is selected in one of the following three line hunting orders Normal Reverse default Sequential This is determined by System Programming lt Section 3 2 Trunk Group Line Hunting Order in the Programming Guide gt e ARS Override If Automatic Route Selection ARS is activated it is overridden by an outgoing call made by pressing the G CO button Features Guide 197 General Features Programming Guide References 2 2 Tenant Automatic Route Selection 2 3 Numbering Plan Local CO Line Access ARS Trunk Group Access 2 4 Class of Service COS Trunk Group Setting 2 6 Local Hunt Sequence 3 2 Trunk Group Line Hunting Order 4 3 Extension Lin
155. eatures Guide References 1 3 System Features e Extension Group e Incoming Group 1 6 Originating Features e Operator Call User Manual References e 4 4 Operator Manager Service Features 78 Features Guide General Features Outgoing Message OGM Description Allows the Manager or an Operator to record and playback Outgoing Messages The following three types of Outgoing Messages can be recorded Conditions DISA message This message is played when an outside caller accesses the system via DISA line Timed Reminder wake up message This message is used in Timed Reminder When answering the Timed Reminder alarm often used as a wake up call the extension user will hear this message UCD Uniform Call Distribution message This message is played to the outside callers in conjunction with the UCD feature Hardware Requirements A DISA card KX T96191 is required to record an OGM Up to eight DISA cards can be installed in the system One OGM message can be recorded on a DISA card OGM Group Recording of OGM is performed per OGM Group 1 8 which consists of one or more DISA cards Up to eight OGM Groups are available in the system OGM Type OGM Type is decided on an OGM Group basis Tenant Service If Tenant Service is employed the affiliation of OGM Group should be decided by System Programming Installation Manual References 2 6 1 DISA Card KX T96191 Programming Guide References 2 2 Te
156. ecomes available Go to step 2 e What if OGM 1 is OUS Out of Service Step 1 will be skipped Go to step 2 2 The caller is put in the waiting queue for 16 seconds 2T 3 The caller hears OGM 3 Sample OGM 3 Sorry all lines are still busy Please call us again Thank you for calling If OGM 3 is busy the caller first hears Music on Hold and then will hear OGM 3 as soon as it becomes available 4 The caller is disconnected from the switch 148 Features Guide General Features Example 3 1T gt TR D 2 L UCD group 1 The caller is put in the waiting queue for 8 seconds 1T 2 The caller is transferred to the Overflow destination Example 4 Bee gt D D O9 o O 1 The caller hears OGM 1 if available Sample OGM 1 Sorry all lines are busy Please wait a moment e What if OGM 1 is busy The caller first hears a ringback tone and then will hear OGM 1 as soon as it becomes available Go to step 2 e What if OGM 1 is OUS Out of Service Step 1 will be skipped Go to step 2 2 The caller is put in the waiting queue for 16 seconds 2T 3 The caller hears OGM 4 Sample OGM 4 Sorry all lines are still busy Please wait a moment If OGM 4 is busy the caller hears Music on Hold and then will hear OGM 4 as soon as it becomes available 4 Same as step 2 5 The caller is transferred to the Overflow destination Notes
157. ect Inward Dialing DID rreraren erren endeid raa aer ie epa eea 124 Direct Inward System Access DISA ssennssnsssssensssnssnnnnsnnnennensnnnnnnennnn nen 128 Rina Group sve 2 un riae ER dani eee aioe nen a aes 134 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS ssenssenssssessnnnennensnnennnsennnn nenn 136 Uniform Call Distribution UCD cc e aaan aaae eean R aAa 138 Origin ting Feature i ccccc c ctecesssescecssssevesseccsessccatcessedesesetuacceseccccesetesessseccssssedessssececens 153 Alternate Calling Ring Voice u eeessessessseesnerssnennnssnnesnennnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnensennennann 153 Automatic Callback Busy Camp On u2suessesnnessensnnensensensnesnnennnennnennsnnn ons 155 Automatic Route Selection ARS 22200ussssnseeesnnnensnnennnsnnnnnnennsnenensnnn nennen 156 Busy Station Signaling BSS ipenira nn iana areis riiai siia 163 Do Not Disturb DND Override uesessesessssneeesnneenensnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenensnnnnnnn 165 Electronic Station Eock ut ne ass Brenners 166 Emergency Call oirein eE ek IH seen 167 Executive Busy Overnide n 2 2e2 H2 2 rigen ser aer aiaa 168 Inter Offiee C lline 2 20 00 ei Bel na a 170 Line Preference Outgoing Idle Line No Line Prime Line ursseessnessersnnenne 172 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA uueeesseessssneeensnnneennnsnennnnnnennnnsnneennsn nennen 174 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper
158. ed 0 Timed Reminder p Walking Station Conditions None Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Station Program Clear Features Guide References None 304 Features Guide General Features User Manual References e 4 3 71 Station Program Clear Features Guide 305 General Features Station Programming Description Allows the PT user to customize the extension to his needs The following are the programming items available For both APT and DPT e Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment Flexible Button Assignment e Full One Touch Dialing Assignment e Intercom Alert Assignment e Live Call Screening LCS Mode Set e Preferred Line Assignment Incoming Outgoing e Station Programming Data Default Set For DPT only e Handset Headset Selection e Ringing Tone Selection for Line Access Buttons For display PT only e Bilingual Display Selection e Initial Display Selection e Self Extension Number Confirmation For display DPT only e Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment For the Manager s or Operator s extension PT only e Call Log Incoming Log Lock e Live Call Screening Password Clear e Remote Station Lock Control Detailed information and programming instructions are described in Section 2 Station Programming in the User Manual Conditions e During Station Programming the PT is treated as a busy extension Programming Guide Refere
159. ed Red flash FWD mode by System Programming Station or User Programming mode This feature functions even if the extension is in Station User Programming mode Remote FWD Call Forwarding Cancel Once The Manager and the Operators can reach an extension that has set Call Forwarding FWD DND button Regarding the PT without the FWD DND button it can be assigned to a flexible CO DSS PF button by Station User or System Programming Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone dial tone 2 after going off hook depending on System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 15 Special dial tone after setting feature in the Programming Guide gt Features Guide General Features No Answer Busy No Answer The number of rings before the call is forwarded is programmable lt Section 2 5 System Timer Section 4 3 Extension Line Call Forwarding No Answer Time in the Programming Guide gt If 0 is specified in Section 4 3 Extension Line Call Forwarding No Answer Time setting in Section 2 5 System Timer works Follow Me Class of Service COS programming COS programming lt Section 2 4 Class of Service COS Call FWD Follow Me in the Programming Guide gt determines the extension that can perform this feature To CO TIE Line Class of Service COS programming COS programming lt Section 2 4 Class of Service COS
160. egration Automated Attendant AA Service e Integration Voice Mail VM Service e Integration VPS Features Guide 49 General Features 1 9 Answering Features e Live Call Screening LCS 1 12 Conversation Features e Two Way Recording into the Voice Mail User Manual References Not applicable 50 Features Guide General Features Integration Inband Description This is one ofthe VPS Integration features With Inband Integration the KX TD500 System sends the certain information to the VPS with DTME tones Inband Integration can be categorized into the following two types 1 Conditions Voice Mail VM Service Integration This integration works together with Call Forwarding and IRNA features When activated the KX TD500 System sends the digits of the mailbox number of the called extension with DTME tone to the VPS before connecting the caller These digits are commonly known as the Follow on ID As a result the caller who does not know the mailbox number of the corresponding extension can leave a message Automated Attendant AA Service Integration This integration works together with AA service of the VPS When activated the KX TD500 System informs the VPS of the status of the call busy answered ringing etc by sending a code with DTMF tone before sending the normal call progress tone busy tone ringback tone etc These codes enable the VPS to immediately recognize the current status of t
161. el COS extensions toll outward Conditions None restricted by employing his own higher level COS temporarily Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Walking COS 2 4 Class of Service COS Trunk Group Setting TRS Level Day Night Account Code Mode Switching Day Night Mode Call from TRS Level 7 Extension Time Limit of Outside Calls Transfer to CO Call FWD to CO TIE Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Call FWD Follow Me Busy Override DND Override Busy Override Deny Released Link Operation Digits Restriction in CO Talk Mode Automatic Hold SDN COS 4 3 Extension Line COS No Primary COS No Secondary e 4 7 ISDN Extension Line COS No Primary COS No Secondary e 10 6 System Parameters Password Walking COS Features Guide References 200 1 3 System Features Class of Service COS Features Guide General Features 1 6 Originating Features e Toll Restriction User Manual References e 4 3 84 Walking COS Features Guide 201 General Features 1 7 Dialing Features Automatic Station Release Description If the extension user fails to dial any digits within a specified time period after going off hook the user will be disconnected from the line after a reorder tone is sent To get a line again the user must go on hook first and then go off hook Conditions e This function works in the following cases When ma
162. elease button as desired PROGRAM Used to enter exit the Programming mode With KX T7220 and KX T7250 this button can also be used as the PAUSE button REDIAL Used for Last Number Redial SAVE Used to store a dialed telephone number for Saved Number Redial SELECT Used to select the displayed function or to call the displayed phone number SHIFT Used to access the next level of Soft button function Features Guide General Features Soft Pressing a Soft button performs the function operation appearing on the bottom line of the display SP PHONE Speakerphone Used for hands free operation Pressing the button causes the telephone to switch between handset and hands free operation TRANSFER Used to transfer a call to another extension or external destination VOICE CALL MUTE This dual function button is used for hands free intercom monitor and microphone mute during a conversation VOLUME Used to adjust the volume of the telephone speaker handset receiver headset or ringer This button can also be used to adjust the display contrast During Special Display Features operation this button can also be used to change the display The functions of the listed buttons on KX T DSS Consoles are described below ANSWER Used to answer an incoming call to the paired telephone DSS Direct Station Selection Used to access other extensions These buttons are provided with no default setting Eac
163. em e Call Log Incoming A Caller ID information is recorded in the Call Log of a display DPT KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7433 KX T7436 either automatically or manually e A display PT with one line readout KX T7431 and display APTs will show either the name or the number at a time To alternate the display press the key Initial Display Selection If Caller ID is available the initial display Caller ID DID Name or CO Line Name is determined either by Station or System Programming Caller ID Detection is set by System Programming lt Section 1 2 6 Card Properties ELCOT Caller ID Caller ID Detection in the Programming Guide gt CO Line Name can be changed by System Programming lt Section 4 2 Trunk Line Name in the Programming Guide gt e Display Selection While Receiving Caller ID While receiving Caller ID the extension user can alternate the display Caller ID DID Name or CO Line Name by pressing the SHIFT or X button e Caller ID or Call Duration During a call the extension user can alternate the display Caller ID or Duration by pressing the INFO or FWD DND button Features Guide 117 General Features Installation Manual References e 2 5 5 ELCOT Card KX TD50180 e 2 7 4 Caller ID Card KX TD193 Programming Guide References e 1 2 Slot Assignment Caller ID Detection e 2 8 System Option Automatic adjustment of the clock using Caller ID information LCD Display Mode while CO talking
164. ension replies it by default This number of times ranging from 1 to 5 times can be changed by System Programming lt Section 2 5 System Timer Timed Reminder Arrive Count in the Programming Guide gt Timed Reminder Arrive Wait Time The interval time between each Timed Reminder ringing is 60 seconds by default This interval time ranging from 20 to 240 seconds can be changed by System Programming lt Section 2 5 System Timer Timed Reminder Arrive Wait Time in the Programming Guide gt e Hardware Requirements for a wake up call To utilize a wake up call DISA card KX T96191 is required e OGM Recording To utilize a wake up call set OGM Type of an OGM Group to Wake up OGM Recording can be done only by the Manager or an Operator e What if a wake up message is not recorded An alarm tone is heard instead of a wake up message e The number of extension users who can set this feature is not limited However the number of extension users who can hear the wake up message at a time is limited to a maximum of 56 per DISA card If the 57th or later extension user goes off hook to hear the wake up message he will hear the alarm tone instead of the wake up message 222 Features Guide General Features Station Message Detail Recording SMDR SMDR automatically records the detailed Timed Reminder information date time tenant no extension number start no answer answer It is programmable to be printed out when t
165. ependently Programming Guide References e 2 4 Class of Service COS Automatic Hold Features Guide References 1 10 Holding Features e Automatic Hold For Hold 1 11 Transferring Features One Touch Transfer User Manual References Not applicable 244 Features Guide General Features Call Hold Description Allows the extension user to put a call intercom outside on hold Call Hold The held call can be retrieved by the extension user who held it or by any other extension in the same tenant Preventing other extension users from retrieving a held call is also possible for PT users Exclusive Call Hold In this case the call can only be retrieved from the extension on which it is held Conditions Music on Hold Music on Hold is sent to the party on hold if available e What if a call on exclusive hold is not retrieved If a call intercom outside on hold is not retrieved in a specified period of time Hold Recall Time ringing or an alarm tone is sent to the extension user who held the call as a reminder Hold Recall Tone If the extension user is on hook and its speakerphone PT only is off the phone will ring Hold Alarm Tone If the extension user is engaged in a call when the Hold Recall Time expires an alarm tone is sent from the built in speaker of a PT or from the handset receiver of an SLT at 15 second intervals In this case Call Waiting feature should be set at the extension bef
166. er MDN TIE Transfer Features Guide 251 General Features Call Type Intercom calls Extension Transfer 252 Items marked with are not available with Call Forwarding No Answer to CO TIE Line feature Floating Station A Floating Station cannot be programmed as the call forwarding destination Forwarded call is not forwarded furthermore There can be only one stage of Call Forwarding If a call is forwarded to an extension in Call Forwarding mode the call is not forwarded furthermore Message Waiting notification A message waiting notification is left on the Call Forwarding setting extension regardless of a type of Call Forwarding features except for To CO TIE Line and No Answer to CO TIE Line Station Hunting Station Hunting applies to calls forwarded to a busy extension in a Station Hunting group An extension user may have only one type of Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb feature in effect at any time If one of Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb feature is assigned another does not function but the assignment itself is preserved for future use The extension user can choose either one by pressing the FWD DND button while on hook In this case pressing the button changes the settings as follows Haze gt FWD H The lighting patterns of the FWD DND button are as follows Off Both functions are canceled Redon DND mode This setting can be chang
167. er Code Entry Also sounds when answering Timed Reminder call Dial tone 4 Emitted when messages are waiting for extension I s Features Guide General Features Conditions None Programming Guide References e 2 8 System Option Special dial tone after setting feature Features Guide References None User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 287 General Features Hold Recall Description Prevents a call on hold from being kept waiting longer than a pre determined time If the timer expires ringing or an alarm tone is sent to the extension user who held the call as a reminder If the extension is on hook and its speakerphone PT only is off the phone will ring Hold Recall Tone If the extension user is engaged in a call when the Hold Recall Time expires an alarm tone is sent from the built in speaker of a PT or from the handset of an SLT at 15 second intervals Hold Alarm Tone In this case Call Waiting feature should be enabled at the extension beforehand Conditions 288 Hold Recall applies to the following calls Calls on Consultation Hold Calls on Hold Calls on Exclusive Hold Automatic Disconnection If an inside outside call placed on hold is not retrieved within 30 minutes it is automatically disconnected Hold Recall feature can be disabled by System Programming lt Section 2 5 System Timer Hold Recall Time in the Programming Guide gt
168. erences 1 3 System Features e Extension Group e Integration DPT e Integration Inband e Integration VPS 58 Features Guide General Features 1 11 Transferring Features e Call Forwarding e Intercept Routing 1 17 Display Features e Message Waiting User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 82 Voice Mail Transfer e 4 3 83 VPS Integration Features Guide 59 General Features Integration VPS Description The Voice Processing System VPS provides Automated Attendant AA and Voice Mail VM Services The KX TD500 System works well with all Panasonic KX TVS series Voice Processing System VPS and it can be programmed to work with most other manufactures VPSs that fully support Inband Integration However since both the PBX and VPS are independent systems Integration with the VPS is necessary to make the two systems work more closely Without integration both systems will work separately without knowing the status of other system How the KX TD500 System communicate with VPS 1 Inband Integration The KX TD500 System sends the VPS several codes with DTMF tone via speech path Available with not only Panasonic KX TVS series VPSs but with most other manufactures VPSs that fully support Inband Integration 2 DPT Integration The KX TD500 System sends the VPS the information and commands over the DPT data link Available with
169. erform the following features Automatic Callback Busy Camp on Busy Station Signaling BSS Executive Busy Override Extension Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper Programming Guide References 2 4 Class of Service COS DND Override Features Guide References 1 8 Ringing Features e Do Not Disturb DND User Manual References 4 3 27 Do Not Disturb DND 4 3 28 Do Not Disturb DND Override Features Guide 165 General Features Electronic Station Lockout Description Allows the extension user to lock his extension so that other users cannot make outside calls Any 3 digit numeric code 000 999 can be used to lock and unlock the extension Conditions How does this feature restrict the extension This feature restricts the extension from making an outside call only Other operations are not affected e Remote Station Lock Remote Station Lock Control overrides Electronic Station Lockout If the Manager extension or an Operator extension sets Remote Station Lock on an extension that has already been locked by the extension user the extension user cannot unlock it e Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone dial tone 2 after going off hook depending on System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 15 Special dial tone after setting feature in the Programming Gui
170. ers can be connected to the KX TD500 System e External Paging Tone External paging tone is emitted from external pagers before the voice announcement Eliminating the tone is programmable lt Section 2 2 Tenant External Paging Tone in the Programming Guide gt e External Paging Priority External pagers can be used for TAFAS Paging External or Background Music BGM Features Guide 293 General Features External in this order For example if Paging External is overridden by TAFAS a reorder tone is returned to the performer of the Paging External If BGM is overridden by another higher priority it is interrupted and starts again when the higher priority is finished All Group e A maximum of 16 station paging groups each consisting of one or more extension groups can be created in the system lt Section 3 4 Paging Group in the Programming Guide gt e A single Extension Group cannot belong to two or more different Paging Groups at a time e To page extensions paged extensions must belong to some extension group s and this these extension group s must belong to some paging group s e A ringing or busy PT extension cannot receive a paging announcement Deny e Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone dial tone 2 after going off hook depending on System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 15 Special dial ton
171. es This system allows the extension user to signal the other end using DTMF tones during an established call Conditions If the dial type of the line is assigned to DTMF Tone Through mode is established automatically after the dialing sequence is finished and the call is established Pulse to Tone Conversion If the dial type of the line is assigned to dial pulse Tone Through mode is established after the dialing sequence is finished and the buttons are pressed Tone Through button This button can be assigned to a flexible button CO DSS by Station User or System Programming Automatic Hold If Automatic Hold mode is enabled by System Programming Tone Through button is required to perform End to End DTMF Signaling Tone Through button is effective during a call between two extensions extension to outside or a conference call Programming Guide References 2 4 Class of Service COS Automatic Hold 4 3 Extension Line CO Key 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Dial Type Selection 1 12 Conversation Features e Pulse to Tone Conversion User Manual References 274 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 4 3 32 End to End DTMF Signaling Tone Through Features Guide General Features External Feature Access Description Allows the extension user to have access to the features of a host PBX Centrex or Central
172. es of number and name for Caller ID Service can be shared among each tenant under the condition of up to 1000 entries per tenant e If neither the telephone number nor the name is stored in the Caller ID Table the number sent from Caller ID service is displayed e Ifthe network provides a telephone number only the system searches for the matching name for the number from the Caller ID Table and displays both of them e Call Log Incoming A Caller ID information is recorded in the Call Log of a display DPT KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7433 KX T7436 either automatically or manually e A display PT with one line readout KX T7431 and display APTs will show either the name or the number at a time To alternate the display press the key Initial Display Selection If Caller ID is available the initial display Caller ID DID Name or CO Line Name is determined either by Station or System Programming Caller ID Detection is set by System Programming lt Section 4 2 Trunk Line Caller ID in the Programming Guide gt CO Line Name can be changed by System Programming lt Section 4 2 Trunk Line Name in the Programming Guide gt e Display Selection While Receiving Caller ID While receiving Caller ID the extension user can alternate the display Caller ID DID Name or CO Line Name by pressing the SHIFT or button e Caller ID or Call Duration During a call the extension user can alternate the display Caller ID or Duration by pressin
173. essing System one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT integration e g KX TVS100 In addition to the flexible feature numbers fixed feature numbers are provided on the next page 36 Features Guide General Features Fixed Feature Numbers Feature Type 1 Type 2 Default While a busy tone is heard Automatic Callback Busy 6 6 Busy Station Signaling BSS Off Hook Call 1 2 Announcement OHCA Whisper OHCA Executive Busy Override 2 3 While a Do Not Disturb tone is heard Do Not Disturb Override 1 2 While calling or talking Account Code Delimiter 99 99 Alternate Calling Ring Voice Conference 3 3 Door Open 5 5 Pulse to Tone Conversion x x When the extension is on hook Background Music BGM on off 1 HOLD TRANSFER Day Night mode display Time display Self Extension Number display x x switching When a CO call is arriving Receiving the Caller ID information Switching CO Line Name Caller ID Number x x Caller ID Name Conditions Flexible feature numbers can only be dialed while a dial tone is heard If or is included in a feature number it will not be possible for users with dial pulse DP telephone to access the feature Feature Number Conflicts Examples 1 and 11 0 and 00 2 and 21 10 and 101 32 and 321 etc Additional Digits Some flexible feature numbers require additional digits to make the feature active For
174. estriction User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 207 General Features Pickup Dialing Hot Line Description Allows the extension user to call a pre determined extension or outside party automatically just by lifting the handset This feature is also known as Hot Line If the feature is activated and the extension user goes off hook a dial tone is generated for the waiting time and then dialing starts During the waiting time the extension user can make a call to another party overriding the Pickup Dialing function Conditions e To utilize this feature an extension number or an outside telephone number up to 24 digits should be programmed beforehand This feature works only when an extension user goes off hook from on hook status directly e A rotary dial telephone without the button cannot program this feature For programming the phone number temporarily replace a rotary dial telephone with a touch tone telephone which has the button This feature does not work if the extension user goes off hook to answer an incoming call or retrieve a call on hold e This feature does not work if a message notification is left on the extension e Fora PT with a PF 12 button the number stored in the PF12 button is used for Pickup Dialing e Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone dial tone 2 after going off
175. etary Telephone Features DSS Console 1 17 Display Features e Busy Lamp Field User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 16 Call Transfer e 4 3 42 Inter Office Calling e 5 2 6 Direct Station Selection DSS Button Assignment 310 Features Guide General Features Button Flexible Description The use of Flexible Buttons on PT is determined by Station User or System Programming The following three types of Flexible Buttons are provided on PT or DSS Consoles or both e Flexible CO buttons provided on all PTs e Flexible DSS buttons provided on DSS Consoles e Flexible PF Programmable Feature buttons Assignable features by Flexible Button type co DSS PF Features to be assigned Button PT DSS PT DSS Single CO Y vr Group CO v vi Loop CO Y DSS Direct Station Selection Vv v Phantom v PDN Primary Directory Number Vv SDN Secondary Directory Number Vv ONE TOUCH One Touch Dialing v Y Vv MESSAGE Owner Extension Y v MESSAGE OTHER Another Phantom vr Vs Extension FWD DND Call Forwarding Do Not Vv Y Vv Disturb Group FWD Y v SAVE Saved Number Redial Y Vv Vv ACCOUNT Account Code Entry Y v v CONF Conference Vv Vv Y VTR Voice Mail Transfer v v va Log In Log Out Vv Group Log In Log Out Vv Features Guide 311 General Features
176. ewly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service Failure to upgrade the premises PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognize the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and the customer s employees from gaining access to the network and to these codes KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA Tenant Service ARS mode can be turned on off on a tenant basis Toll Restriction Toll Restriction check is performed before ARS is applied Dialing Plan ARS works according to the selected dialing plan Thus if the dialed number is not found in the dialing plan Leading Digits Table the CO call is made by Trunk Access Idle Automatic Line Access feature ARS Override ARS is not applied to a call made by pressing the G CO or S CO button This feature also applies to a call forwarded by Call Forwarding to Trunk feature If a call is made by using a memory dialing Redial One Touch Dialing Station System Speed Dialing Call Log Outgoing a dial tone is not sent to the extension user If the Inter digit time fixed to 15 seconds expires while making an outgoing call with ARS the system will select aCO line on a Local Access basis and return CO dial tone or reorder tone is sent to the caller This is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 59 ARS Call Timeout Mode in the Programming Guide gt Programming Guide References 2 2 Tenant
177. example to set Call Waiting the feature number for Call Waiting must be followed by 1 and to cancel it the same feature number should be followed by 0 Fixed Feature Numbers Type 1 or Type 2 can be selected by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 41 Fixed Feature Number in the Programming Guide gt Default Type 1 Features Guide 37 General Features Programming Guide References e 1 4 Extension Port Assignment Attribute DN e 2 3 Numbering Plan e 2 8 System Option Fixed Feature Number Features Guide References None User Manual References 6 1 2 Feature Numbers List 38 Features Guide General Features Floating Station Description Virtual extension numbers can be assigned to resources to make them appear as real extensions These numbers are defined as Floating Directory Numbers FDN The following resources can have FDNs Incoming Call Type Resource Name Max number DIL DISA DID TIE Intercept Intercom of FDN DID Routing Call ISDN External Pager 2 TAFAS y OGM Group DISA 7 u 5 2 f Modem Remote 1 Vv Vv Vv Y s v Administration Extension np 128 v v Vv Vv Y Vv Phantom Extension a d Incoming Group 96 Vv y v Vv v v n indicates that the FDN can be assigned as the destination K When DIL 1 N is specified in Group Type setting of Incoming Group this
178. exible CO button on a DN type PT by Station User or System Programming e FWD DND Override The call originated by this feature overrides FWD DND Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb feature assigned on the PDN owner extension e A call made by this feature rings the destination PDN button immediately even if delayed ringing or no ring is set on that PDN button Programming Guide References 4 3 Extension Line CO Key Features Guide References 1 11 Transferring Features e Ringing Transfer 1 16 Button Features e Button Line Access User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 2 2 9 PDN SDN Button Delayed Ringing Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 60 PDN Call 4 3 68 Ringing Transfer 180 Features Guide General Features Secret Busy Override Description Allows the extension user to interrupt an existing call either between two inside parties or between an inside party and an outside party without informing the other party Conditions Class of Service COS programming COS programming lt Section 2 4 Class of Service COS Busy Override and Secret Busy Override in the Programming Guide gt determines the extension users who can perform this feature This feature does not work if Executive Busy Override Deny or Data Line Security is set at either one of two extensions or both of them Party A and Party B are in conversation This feature
179. extension users can be programmed as desired There are six pre programmed default absent messages Message No Message 1 Will Return Soon 2 Gone Home 3 At Ext Extension number 4 Back at Minute Hour 5 Out Until Day Month 6 In a Meeting 7 9 zZ Ir ID The means a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at individual extension Conditions e Absent Messages can be programmed either by User or System Programming e Setting or canceling an absent message can be done by any extension user but only callers with a display PT can receive the absent message e An extension user can select only one absent message at a time A newly assigned absent message overwrites the previous one e The selected message is displayed every time the extension user who set the message goes off hook e Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinctive dial Features Guide 327 General Features tone dial tone 2 after going off hook depending on System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 15 Special dial tone after setting feature in the Programming Guide gt Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Absent Message Set Cancel e 2 8 System Option Special dial tone after setting feature e 5 8 Absent Message Features Guide References None User Manual References
180. extension user Timed Reminder or by the Manager or an Operator Timed Reminder Remote Station Message Detail Recording SMDR SMDR automatically records the detailed Timed Reminder information date time tenant no extension number start no answer answer It is programmable by System Programming to be printed out when the Timed Reminder starts and the alarm is answered or not answered Please refer to Station Message Detail Recording SMDR of Section 1 3 System Features for further information The print out example is shown below Date 22 02 00 22 02 00 22 02 00 2g is 2k 2g 2s 2s 2k 2s E E E E E ER 2c E ois E 2s E E E E E E E E E E E E E EE RT ie E E E ois E 2s ois E ie E E E E E E E E E oi E ig FT E E E 2 E E E E E K K K K K K K k k k k k K k k kK k K i ok ok kK ok Time T Ext CO Dial Number Ring Duration Acctcode CC EEEE EEE 2s 2s E 2s E E EE E E E E 2s E E E E E E E E E E E 2s E EE E E E E E E E E 2s E E E E E E E E E E E 2s E E E E E E ois E E E E 2 K k K K K K K K K k k k k k K kK K kK kK K kkk kK K 01 31PM 1 EI1017 Timed Reminder Start 01 31PM 1 EI1017 Timed Reminder No Answer 01 31PM 1 E1017 Timed Reminder Answer Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone dial tone 2 after going off hook depending on System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 15 Special dial tone after setting feature in the Programming Guide g
181. extensions simultaneously e The lighting patterns and status of the Phantom button are shown below Lighting pattern Phantom Extension Status Off Idle Red on Calling a phantom extension Green rapid flash Incoming call Conditions e A phantom button can be assigned to a flexible CO button by Station User or System Programming e A phantom extension number must be assigned by System Programming before assigning the Phantom button e A maximum of 448 phantom extension numbers can be assigned Each number has 3 to 4 digits consisting of numbers 0 through 9 e Phantom extension number can be assigned to both PTs and SLTs e Types of calls whose destination can be the phantom extension are Outside calls DID DID ISDN DIL 1 1 DISA IRNA Operator Overflow UCD Overflow TIE Intercom calls Extension Transfer e The extension user can call the phantom extension by pressing the Phantom button or by dialing the phantom extension number If several extensions have the same phantom extension number they will ring simultaneously e The phantom extension number cannot be used for feature settings such as Call Forwarding e Phantom Extension ringing is programmable Programming Guide References 4 3 Extension Line CO Key 5 3 Phantom Extension Features Guide References 1 8 Ringing Features e Log In Log Out 84 Features Guide General Features User Manual References e 2
182. fore sending DTMF signal Follow on ID Pause timing before sending DTMF signal RBT BT Turn off control of Message Waiting lamp Extension s mailbox number Features Guide References 52 1 3 System Features e Integration Automated Attendant AA Service e Integration DPT e Integration Voice Mail VM Service e Integration VPS Features Guide General Features User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 53 General Features Integration Voice Mail VM Service Description 54 This is one of the VPS Integration features The Voice Mail VM Service provided by the VPS is a voice message receiving taking and delivery service which allows callers to leave messages in the mailbox of the desired extension user If VM Service Integration is enabled the KX TD500 System connects the caller to a VM extension and sends the mailbox number Follow on ID of the corresponding extension so that the caller can leave the message in the mailbox of the corresponding extension without knowing their mailbox number To utilize the VM Service Integration group multiple VM extensions together as an Extension Group and assign the group type of it as VM By default Extension Group 126 is assigned as VM Group Within a VM Group an incoming call hunts for an idle VM extension in a circular way This ensures that callers who need the VM service can surely access it Up to 128 VM Groups each c
183. g Destination Day Night Group Type FWD DND Mode e 4 2 Trunk Line Destination Day Night Lunch Break e 4 3 Extension Line Group No e 4 7 ISDN Extension Line Group No Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Extension Group e Incoming Group 1 8 Ringing Features e Log In Log Out User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 221 General Features Timed Reminder Wake Up Call Description Each telephone can be set to generate an alarm tone at a preset time as a reminder When this feature is set an alarm tone will ring for 30 seconds default at the programmed time Wake up call Ifa voice message is recorded beforehand a wake up message is heard instead of an alarm tone when an extension user goes off hook This feature can be activated only once or everyday at a specified time Conditions System Time Be sure that the system clock is working correctly System Time can be programmed either by User or System Programming e Setting a new time clears the preset time e Timed Reminder Ringing Time The alarm tone continues to ring the destination extension for 30 seconds by default This period of time ranging from 30 to 240 seconds can be changed by System Programming lt Section 2 5 System Timer Timed Reminder Ringing Time in the Programming Guide gt Timed Reminder Arrive Count Timed Reminder ringing is repeated up to 3 times until the destination ext
184. g CO calls and does not work on outgoing CO calls except once they are placed on Call Hold Exclusive Call Hold or Consultation Hold In this case if the extension user remains off hook after the completion of an outgoing CO call the system does not release all the switches used to establish the connection The connected CO line will continue to be in use To prevent this it is programmable to make CPC Signal Detection work on outgoing CO calls Note Some Central Offices CO may send CPC like signals during the dialing sequence and an attempt to make a call may be terminated If your CO sends such signals it is recommended to make CPC Signal Detection work on outgoing CO calls e Digits Restriction in CO Talk Mode If your Central Office does not send CPC like signals it is effective to limit the number of dialing digits permitted during a CO call by System Programming lt Section 2 4 Class of Service COS Digits Restriction in CO Talk Mode in the Programming Guide gt to prevent unauthorized calls e IfaCPC Signal is detected during a Conference call the line is disconnected and the remaining two parties resume the call e IfaCPC Signal is detected during a DISA call the line is disconnected Programming Guide References 2 4 Class of Service COS Digits Restriction in CO Talk Mode 4 2 Trunk Line CPC Signal OUT Detection CPC Signal OUT Detection Detection Time CPC Signal IN Detection CPC Signal
185. g a CO line Loop ON ELCOT Idle status Busy status the Default status of Loop OFF grabbing a CO line Loop ON GCOT Idle status Busy status the During a The busy status depends on the Central Default status of conversation Office connected to the PBX Loop OFF grabbing aCO Loop ON Not connected line Not to Ring FG Loop OFF connectedto Connected to Ring FG Ring FG DID Idle status The DID card is a card for only Fixed incoming call It is assignable for Trunk Busy out but DID call comes in on even after the setup because the DC power On Off to the Central Office from a DID card cannot be controlled Features Guide 105 General Features The Specification of Trunk Busy out On Card Type The status of Trunk Busy out set to On Note T1 LCO Idle status Fixed GCO Idle status Fixed TIE The behavior depends on the Start Signal Type System Programming 1 Immediate the same as the usual idle status 2 Wink When Wink Mode is selected by the PBX When the Central Office processes an incoming call it grabs a CO line to the PBX But when the PBX busied out the trunk port the PBX does not issue a wink signal So the Central Office cannot complete the call A reorder tone is returned to the caller If the Central Office is a KX TD500 the caller will see on hiss phone display CO Not Assigned DID Idle status Fixed Conditions N
186. g the INFO or FWD DND button e This feature is available when the Caller ID is assigned to Enable In addition a channel of T1 card must be assigned as DID or a channel of T1 card must be assigned as TIE E amp M and the incoming type must be assigned as DIL by System Programming Features Guide 119 General Features Installation Manual References e 2 5 4 T1 Digital Trunk Card KX T96187 Programming Guide References e 1 6 TI Port Assignment Channel Type e 4 2 Trunk Line Incoming Type Name Caller ID e 4 3 Extension Line Initial Display Selection Call Log Incoming Overwrite Mode Call Log Incoming Lock Password e 5 11 Caller ID Modification Local Call Area Code Local Call Digits to delete Local Call Number to be added Long Distance Call Digits to delete Long Distance Call Number to be added e 5 12 Caller ID Registration e 10 4SMDR Print out Caller ID Information Features Guide References 1 17 Display Features e Call Log Incoming e Display Call Information User Manual References e 2 2 6 Initial Display Selection e 3 2 6 006 Caller ID Dial Set e 3 2 7 007 Caller ID Name Set e 4 5 3 Call Information Display KX T7436 KX T7433 KX T7235 KX T7230 only e 4 5 4 Call Log Incoming KX T7436 KX T7433 KX T7235 KX T7230 only 120 Features Guide General Features Direct In Lines DIL Description Enables an i
187. ge waiting The called party with aMESSAGE button Another Extension Message Waiting button or Phantom Extension Message Waiting button knows there is a message if the MESSAGE button Another Extension Message Waiting button or Phantom Extension Message Waiting button LED Light Emitting Diode lights red Pressing the lit MESSAGE button Another Extension Message Waiting button or Phantom Extension Message Waiting button or dialing the Message Waiting feature number can call back the caller or listen to messages which are stored in a mailbox in the Voice Processing System Conditions e Turning off the light Either the message sender or the receiver can turn off the light e MESSAGE button Owner Extension If a MESSAGE button is not provided on a PT it can be assigned to a flexible CO DSS button by Station User or System Programming MESSAGE OTHER button Another Extension Phantom Extension The Another Extension Message Waiting button or the Phantom Extension Message Waiting button can be assigned to a flexible CO button by User or System Programming and to a flexible DSS button by System Programming e SLTs with message waiting lamp Any extension user can turn on the message waiting lamp on an SLT in the same way as the PTs SLTs with message waiting lamp should be connected to an ESLC KX TD50175 or SLC M KX T96175 card One of 12 message waiting lamp lighting patterns for SLTs can be selected by System Programming e VPS
188. h X0901 X0924 X Shelf No 1 Basic 2 Expansion 1 3 Expansion 2 e Extension Number Assignment is required when a channel of T1 card is assigned as OPX e If your system is interfaced by T1 interface with another exchange select the external clock mode by System Programming lt Section 1 2 16 TSW card configuration in the Programming Guide gt Installation Manual References e 2 5 4 T1 Digital Trunk Card KX T96187 Features Guide 97 General Features Programming Guide References e 1 2 Slot Assignment System Clock Status Clock Configuration Mode Clock Configuration Master Card No Clock Configuration Priority 1 8 e 1 6 TI Port Assignment Features Guide References None User Manual References Not applicable 98 Features Guide General Features Tenant Service Description The KX TD500 System can be shared with up to eight tenants When tenant service is utilized each tenant can use the system resource differently and independently from other tenants This enables the configuration of more than two systems which in each case are suited to different tenants Some system resources can be used in common and some can be divided among tenants Common Resources 1 AGC Automatic Gain Control ARS Table COS Class of Service DID Dial Registration so na BW WN Absent Messages Emergency Number Incoming Group Music Sources MUS1
189. h DSS button can be programmed to correspond to each different extension DSS buttons can also be programmed for the other function buttons PF Programmable Feature These buttons are provided with no default setting and can be programmed to be a One Touch Dialing FWD DND SAVE Account CONF Conference Answer or Release button as desired RELEASE Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation or to complete a Call Transfer Conditions e LED Indication Certain buttons are equipped with LED Light Emitting Diode indicators to show line or feature status e CO Button Type CO buttons can be classified as the following three types Single CO S CO button Group CO G CO button Loop CO L CO button e For the operation of each button please refer to the User Manual Programming Guide References e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key Features Guide 321 General Features Features Guide References 1 16 Button Features e Button Flexible User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 322 Features Guide General Features LED Indication Description The LED Light Emitting Diode indicators of the Line Access Buttons display the line conditions with the following lighting patterns Off Steady On Slow flash Moderate flash Rapid flash This allows the extension user to see the current status of the line Flashing light winks pat
190. he Manager or an Operator e Recording mode Each extension can be programmed to either stop or continue recording the conversation after intercepting the recording in order to talk with the caller e LCS by an SLT only in Private Mode A single line telephone which is connected with a Proprietary Telephone in parallel can also be used to monitor a recording message Be sure that Live Call Screening has been activated on the connected proprietary telephone This feature is useful when you are out with a portable handset of a cordless telephone SLT The handset sounds an alert tone to let you know that a message is being recorded To intercept the call flash the switchhook t Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT integration e g KX TVS100 Features Guide 241 General Features Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Live Call Screening e 4 3 Extension Line LCS Setting LCS Setting LCS Setting LCS Setting CO Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key Status Operation Mode Recording Mode LCS Password nn Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Integration DPT User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 2 2 8 Live Call Screening LCS Mode Set e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4
191. he Timed Reminder starts and the alarm is answered or not answered The print out example is shown below 2g is 2A 2g 2s 2s 2k 2s E E E E E EEE E E REF E E ois E E E E E E E E E E oie E E E E ois E 2s E E E E E oie E E E ois E E E E E RT oie ois E E E E E K ois K K K K K K K k k k k K K k kK K k ok oi ok ok K ok Date Time T Ext CO Dial Number Ring Duration Acct code CC 2g 2g 25 2k 2g 2s 2k 2s 2s E 2s E E EE E EE E 2s E E 2s E EE E E 2 E E 2 E EE E E E E E 2k E E 2s E E ie E E E E E E E E 2 E E E E E E E 2k E E E E E E K K K K K E K k k k k k K k K k k k kkk kK K 22 02 00 01 31PM 1 E1017 Timed Reminder Start 22 02 00 01 31PM 1 E1017 Timed Reminder No Answer 22 02 00 01 31PM 1 E1017 Timed Reminder Answer e To stop the alarm lift the handset or with a PT press any button e Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone dial tone 2 after going off hook depending on System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 15 Special dial tone after setting feature in the Programming Guide gt Alert Extension An Alert extension can be assigned for Day Night mode per tenant respectively by System Programming lt Section 2 2 Tenant Alert Extension in the Programming Guide gt e Alert button assignment The Alert button can be assigned to a flexible CO button on the Alert extension e Alert Ringing If Timed Reminder Wake Up Call is not responded by the
192. he call and improve its call handling performance To utilize this feature one of the following extension cards which support the SLT interface is required DHLC ESLC HLC SLC or SLC M Installation Manual References 2 4 1 HLC Card KX T96170 2 4 3 SLC Card KX T96174 2 4 4 SLC M Card KX T96175 2 4 6 DHLC Card KX TD50170 2 4 8 ESLC Card KX TD50175 Features Guide 51 General Features Programming Guide References 3 2 Trunk Group Intercept Destination Day Night 3 3 Extension Group FDN Tenant No Overflow Setting Destination Day Night Group Type 4 2 Trunk Line Incoming Type Destination Day Night Lunch Break 4 3 Extension Line Group No Name Mailbox No COS No Primary COS No Secondary Intercept Destination Day Night 5 10 VPS Integration Integration Code Ringback Tone Integration Code Busy Tone Integration Code Reorder Tone Integration Code DND Tone Integration Code Extension Answer Integration Code Extension Disconnection Integration Code Confirmation Tone Integration Code FWD to VM Ringback Tone Integration Code FWD to VM Busy Tone Integration Code FWD to Extension Ringback Tone Voice Mail Command Leave Message Voice Mail Command Get Message Voice Mail Command AA Service Voice Mail Command VM Service DTMF signal duration Pause timing be
193. he call destination is not registered If the received number has no corresponding destinations a reorder tone is sent to the caller or the call is redirected to the IRNA destination IRNA feature This is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 22 legal Number DID in the Programming Guide gt e What if the call destination is busy If the destination of a DID call is in busy status the caller may hear a busy tone or the call is redirected to the IRNA destination or the call waits until the destination becomes idle Features Guide 125 General Features This is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 18 Destination Busy DID in the Programming Guide gt The tenant number and VPS trunk group number can be assigned in the DID table so that the system is shared with tenants on a DID No basis It is programmable whether to enable or disable the tenant assigned on a DID No basis by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option VM Trunk Service for DID in the Programming Guide gt Tenant number is used to determine the time mode day night for the corresponding DID number VPS trunk group number is used in DPT Integration Installation Manual References 2 5 3 DID Card KX T96182 2 5 4 T1 Digital Trunk Card KX T96187 Programming Guide References 1 3 Trunk Port Assignment Group No 1 6 T1 Port Assignment Channel Type Group No 2 8 System Opti
194. ide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References None User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 67 General Features Music on Hold Description The system provides Music on Hold to callers on hold if available Conditions Operations such as Call Hold Exclusive Call Hold or Consultation Hold generates Music on Hold Music on Hold or Ringback tone It is programmable whether to send aringback tone or Music on Hold to the caller while his call is being transferred To send Music on Hold to the caller the following optional equipment and System Programming are required Connect External Music Source such as a radio to the system lt Section 2 8 2 External Music Source in the Installation Manual gt Select MUSI or MUS2 in Music on Hold Source menu lt Section 2 2 Tenant in the Programming Guide gt Select Music on Hold in 1 Sound source during transfer menu lt Section 2 8 System Option in the Programming Guide gt Hardware Requirements It is necessary to connect a user supplied external music source such as a radio to the system Up to two external music sources can be connected to the system The music source is used for Music on Hold or BGM or both If external music sources are in use you can select a music source for each usage Installation Manual References 2 8 2 External Music Source Programming Guide References 2 2 Te
195. ietary Telephone Features e DSS Console 1 16 Button Features e Button Direct Station Selection DSS User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 330 Features Guide General Features Call Directory Description Allows the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 and KX T7235 users to make a call using the following call directories which can easily be accessed by using the display Directory type Description Extension Dialing Provides a display of extension names This is convenient to make an extension Directory call just by name The extension user can another extension simply by pressing the Function button associated with the name Station Speed A list of the names and telephone numbers stored in Station Speed Dialing is Dialing Directory displayed This allows the extension user to make a Station Speed Dialing call by knowing just the name System Speed A list of the names stored in System Speed Dialing is displayed This allows the Dialing Directory extension user to dial by name without having to know the telephone number All the user needs to do is to press the Function button associated with the desired name Conditions Extension Dialing Directory e Extension name can be programmed either by User Programming lt Section 3 2 4 004 Extension Name Set in the User Manual gt or System Programming lt Section 4 3 Extension Line Name in
196. ime expires The caller can dial while hearing the OGM message DISA User Code This system can store up to 32 programmable DISA user codes with a COS Class of Service level for each Each code should be unique DISA User Code Entry Failure If the DISA caller fails to enter the valid DISA user code three times consecutively the call will be disconnected DISA built in Automated Attendant Table This system can store up to 8 DISA built in auto attendant number tables each having 10 one digit numbers DISA built in Automated Attendant Number The DISA built in auto attendant number may be the same as the first digit of other numbers extension number Floating Number etc To avoid confusion the system waits for the second digit for a pre programmed amount of time default 1 second If the second digit is not dialed before the timer expires the system assumes that the first digit is a DISA built in auto attendant number Call Forwarding to CO or TIE Line When a DISA call is forwarded to an outside party the caller is not required to enter a DISA user code regardless of the Security modes CO to CO line call duration The duration of CO to CO line calls can be limited by System Programming When a specified period of time default 10 min expires both lines are disconnected unless the caller prolongs the duration time if available A warning tone is sent to both parties 15 seconds before the time limit at 5 second intervals P
197. ing Fe t res u ccceccecccckdenssekdextdesdettdeccunddccauntdeccetdecesdexteedcexedsescdedsdacvdcceesenes 216 Do Not Disturb COND encde cd 2a na ni ia en ee 216 Logeln Cog Out s ta aie titer iil ner aati hs 218 Station Hunting 02s ee ara tennis 220 Timed Reminder Wake Up Call cceccccecsccceneeceseeeeeeeeeaeeeaaeceeneceeaeeeeaeeeeaaeceaeeceeeees 222 Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call ucseesseessssessnnnesnnensnneensnennnnnnnnn 225 1 9 Answering Features ecsssssonsssonussonssssnssennnnsnnnnsnnnnsnnnnssnnnsnsnnnsnennennnnssnnnssnnsssnnnsnsnnnee 227 ANSWER and RELEASE buttons Operation eee eseeseceseceeeceseceseeeaeeeseeeaeeesaeens 227 Answering Direet Tr nk r2 2 en an rin RE a 229 Call Pickup steven sith 2 2222 aY ee ka ia Beh a a a ene ip ene le 230 Call Waitine 3 Hew Seed eee en ah oe e AAR it 233 Call Waiting from Central Office u220u220nennnesnnenseennnnnnnesnnesnennnnennnennennnn ernennen 236 Executive Busy Override Deyy uun annr sanieren nenne 237 Hands free Answerbacks reimana ae ani a eel dern 238 Line Preference Incoming No Line Prime Line Ringing Line un 239 Live Call Screening ECS anna ee la ns ee eileh 241 1 10 Holding Feature lt cccccccccccscccarsscsetetscsesciseseseeseeseceusesetetsessosusessedctessedcssssedeserscecsesssseats 243 Automatic Hold For Hold rasterna iei ee e o e E a 243 Automatic Hold For TransferT
198. ing a conversation with an outside party a call waiting tone offered by the local Central Office informs the extension user of another incoming CO call that is waiting He can answer the new call by placing the current call on hold Conditions FLASH Button Operation Pressing the FLASH button on a PT results in either sending Flash signal or disconnecting the current call This is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 3 FLASH button operation while CO talking and 4 FLASH button operation when Don t release the trunk is selected at 3 in the Programming Guide gt e Flash Time The flash time must be assigned as required by the Central Office e lt PT gt FLASH button or the feature number is used to perform this feature lt SLT gt Feature number is used to perform this feature This feature does not function if an SLT has a call on Consultation Hold Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan External Feature Access e 2 8 System Option FLASH button operation while CO talking FLASH button operation when Don t release the trunk is selected at 3 e 3 2 Trunk Group Flash Time Max Dial No after EFA Signal Features Guide References 1 12 Conversation Features e External Feature Access e Flash User Manual References e 4 3 18 Call Waiting from Central Office 4 3 35 External Feature Access 236 Features Guide General Features Executive B
199. inistration can be performed in on line mode except for the procedures of the diagnosis 12 Features Guide General Features Installation Manual References e 2 6 3 RMT Card KX T96196 e 2 6 4 ERMT Card KX TD50197 Programming Guide References e 10 2 External Modem 1 2 e 10 3 External Modem 2 2 e 10 6 System Parameters Password System Programming Protection Level 1 Password System Programming Protection Level 2 Password System Programming Protection Level 3 Password System Programming Protection Level 4 Serial Interface Port PROG Parity Serial Interface Port PROG NL Code Serial Interface Port PROG Word Length Serial Interface Port PROG Stop Bit Serial Interface Port PROG Baud Rate a i a G Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e External Modem Control User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 13 General Features Traffic Measurement Description Provides current traffic information about following items individually You can collect and display the traffic information using the Maintenance Console PC Station Trunk Group Operator UCD OGM AGC Incoming Group NAMB wWN Please refer to Section 4 3 1 Traffic Information in the Installation Manual Conditions None Installation Manual References 4 3 Traffic Information Programming Guide References System Programming
200. ion Presentation CLIP Features Guide 357 ISDN Features Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR Description Allows the extension user to restrict the presentation of the calling party s number to the called party when making a call This is one of the ISDN supplementary services Conditions e Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP If CLIP service is enabled the called party can find out who is calling before deciding to answer the call ISDN Public Switched Telephone Network This feature applies to the calls over the ISDN Public Switched Telephone Network e Hardware Requirements To utilize this feature a BRI card KX TD50288 or a PRI23 card KX TD50290 is required Installation Manual References e 2 5 6 BRI Card KX TD50288 e 2 5 7 PRI23 Card KX TD50290 Programming Guide References e 1 2 Slot Assignment e 1 8 BRI Port Assignment e 1 8 BRI Port Assignment Type Group No e 1 9 PRI Port Assignment Type Group No e 2 3 Numbering Plan CLIR CNIR e 4 2 Trunk Line Subscriber e 4 3 Extension Line CLIP Number Public e 4 7 ISDN Extension Line CLIP Number Public Features Guide References 2 2 ISDN Originating Features e Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP 358 Features Guide ISDN Features User Manual References e 4 3 20 Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR Calling Name Identification Restriction CNIR Featu
201. is not required Features Guide References None User Manual References Not applicable 14 Features Guide General Features User Programming with Proprietary Telephone Description Allows a PT user to assign or change the following System Programming items at his own PT Access No Title 000 Date and Time Set 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set 002 System Speed Dialing Name Set 004 Extension Name Set 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 006 Caller ID Dial Set 007 Caller ID Name Set 008 Absent Messages Set 009 Quick Dial Number Set 010 DISA TIE User Code Set Conditions e User Programming Password is required to perform User Programming Programming Guide References e 10 6 System Parameters Password User Programming PT Features Guide References None User Manual References e 3 User Programming Features Guide 15 General Features 1 3 System Features Account Code Entry Description An Account Code max 10 digits is used to identify incoming and outgoing CO calls for accounting and billing purposes For Outgoing CO Calls One of the following three Account Code Entry modes is selected for each extension on a Class of Service basis Verified All Calls mode An extension user must always enter a pre assigned account code when making CO calls Verified Toll Restriction Override mode An extension user c
202. isper 176 Off Hook Monitor 279 One Touch Dialing 205 One Touch Transfer 263 Operator Call 178 Operator Group 74 Originating Features 153 Outgoing Message OGM 79 Outgoing Message OGM Group 81 Outside CO Line and TIE Line Connection 370 Features Guide P Paging 293 Paging Features 293 Paralleled Telephone 82 Pause Insertion Automatic 207 PDN Call 180 Phantom Extension 84 Pickup Dialing Hot Line 208 Power Failure Re Start 115 Power Failure Transfer 116 Privacy Release 280 Privacy Automatic 281 Proprietary Telephone Features 296 Pulse to Tone Conversion 282 Q Quick Dialing 210 R Redial 211 Released Link Operation 86 Remote Station Feature Control 87 Remote Station Lock Control 89 Ring Group 134 Ringing Features 216 Ringing Tone Selection 290 Ringing Transfer 265 Ringing Delayed 291 Ringing Discriminating 292 S Secret Busy Override 181 Secret Dialing 90 Special Display Features 345 Station Hunting 220 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 91 Station Program Clear 304 Station Programming 306 Station Programming Data Default Set 308 Station Speed Dialing 213 System Administration 11 System Data Default Set 96 System Expansion 10 System Feature Access Menu 346 System Features 16 System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer 11 System Speed Dialing 214 T T1 Carrier 97 Tenant Service 99 TIE Line and Outside CO Line Connection 374 TIE Line and
203. ken as being interchangeable 2 Features Guide Introduction Terms used in this Features Guide Installation Manual References The required installation instruction titles described in the Installation Manual are noted for your reference Programming Guide References The related and required programming titles described in the Programming Guide are noted for your reference System Programming should be done with a PC Features Guide References The related feature titles described in this Features Guide are noted for your reference User Manual References The operation s required to implement the feature described in the User Manual is are noted for your reference About the other manuals Along with this Features Guide the following manuals are available to help you install program and use the KX TD500 System Installation Manual Provides instructions for installing the hardware and system maintenance Programming Guide Provides step by step instructions for performing System Programming using the Maintenance Console software for a PC User Manual Designed for users of Digital Super Hybrid System KX TD500 The focus is Digital Proprietary Telephones DPTs Digital DSS Consoles Single Line Telephones SLTs and their features Trademarks e Microsoft is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries e All other trademarks identified he
204. king a call 1 The first digit has not been dialed within 10 seconds 2 After a digit is dialed the next one is not dialed within 10 seconds Intercom call only Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References 1 7 Dialing Features e Pickup Dialing Hot Line User Manual References Not applicable 202 Features Guide General Features Full One Touch Dialing Description Allows the PT user to have simple access to a desired party or system feature by pressing just one button without first going off hook Hands free operation is automatically provided simply by pressing one of the following buttons e One Touch Dialing DSS both on PTs and DSS Consoles e REDIAL e SAVE e Function F1 F10 Special Display Features for KX T7235 and KX T7436 only Conditions e This feature can be enabled or disabled by Station Programming Programming Guide References e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key PF Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key PF Key Features Guide References 1 7 Dialing Features e One Touch Dialing e Redial 1 12 Conversation Features e Hands free Operation 1 16 Button Features e Button Direct Station Selection DSS 1 17 Display Features e Call Directory Features Guide 203 General Features User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 2 2 4 Full One Touch Dialing Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO
205. l buttons on PT are in use e When you reset the system during this process the setting is canceled Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Walking Station Features Guide References None User Manual References 4 3 85 Walking Station Features Guide 111 General Features 1 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics Local Alarm Description If asystem error is detected during on line communication mode the Alarm light on the Manager extension turns red An error message will be shown on the display PT of the Manager by pressing the red lit Alarm button If a major error occurs minor errors will be neglected and only the first major error message will be displayed The second error will be neglected if the error priority is the same as the first one Please refer to Section 5 Troubleshooting in the Installation Manual for further information on error messages Error Message List Priority order Error Message Description Priority Alarm LED ERR CLCK IC Calendar IC failure 1 ERR DC DOWN DC power down 1 B B S FAN FLT Basic shelf fan alarm 1 E E S1 FAN FLT Expansion shelf 1 fan alarm 1 E E S2 FAN FLT Expansion shelf 2 fan alarm 1 E B S OVER HEAT Basic shelf heat alarm 1 E E S1 OVER HEAT Expansion shelf 1 heat alarm 1 E E S2 OVER HEAT Expansion shelf 2 heat alarm 1 E ERR TSW DWN TSW clock down 1 B ERR BAT ALM CPU
206. lash Features Guide 275 General Features User Manual References e 4 3 18 Call Waiting from Central Office 4 3 35 External Feature Access 4 3 51 Off Hook Monitor 276 Features Guide General Features Flash Description The FLASH button is used to allow a PT user to disconnect the current call and originate another call without hanging up Conditions e Flash or External Feature Access Pressing the FLASH button on a PT results in either sending Flash signal External Feature Access or disconnecting the current call Flash This is determined by System Programming Please refer to Programming Guide References below e Pressing the FLASH button re starts the conversation duration outputs an SMDR record and checks toll restriction level again Programming Guide References e 2 8 System Option FLASH button operation while CO talking FLASH button operation when Don t release the trunk is selected at 3 e 3 2 Trunk Group Disconnecting Time Features Guide References 1 12 Conversation Features External Feature Access User Manual References e 4 3 35 External Feature Access e 4 3 37 Flash Features Guide 277 General Features Hands free Operation Description Allows the PT user to dial and to talk to the other party without lifting the handset Pressing an appropriate button provides hands free mode Conditions This function can be utilized by pressing a button liste
207. le for Levels 2 through 6 Complete every table by storing numbers that are exceptions to the TRS deny codes These numbers are defined as exception codes Up to 200 exception codes max 10 digits for each can be stored for TRS Levels 2 through 6 Applicable TRS Deny and TRS Exception Code Tables depend on the assigned toll restriction level of an extension as follows TRS Deny Code Tables TRS Exception Code Tables Level 1 None None Level 2 Table for Level 2 Tables for Levels 2 6 Level 3 Tables for Levels 2 and 3 Tables for Levels 3 6 Level 4 Tables for Levels 2 to 4 Tables for Levels 4 6 Level 5 Tables for Levels 2 to 5 Tables for Levels 5 6 Level 6 Tables for Levels 2 to 6 Tables for Level 6 Level 7 None None Features Guide 183 General Features 184 TRS Deny Code Tables TRS Exception Code Tables Level 8 None None Explanation Level 1 allows all calls Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Level 7 Level 8 denies codes stored in the TRS Deny Code Table for Level 2 except the codes stored in TRS Exception Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6 denies codes stored in the TRS Deny Code Tables for Levels 2 and 3 except the codes stored in TRS Exception Code Tables for Levels 3 through 6 denies codes stored in the TRS Deny Code Tables for Levels 2 through 4 except the codes stored in TRS Exception Code Tables for Levels 4 through
208. ll The SLT is activated Both the PT and the SLT will ring except when the PT is in Hands free Answerback mode or Voice Alerting mode The SLT is deactivated PT rings but the SLT does not ring e When the SLT is in operation the display and LED indicator on the paired PT will work in the same way as if the PT is in operation e If APT SLT are used the extension user cannot originate a call from the SLT if the APT is playing BGM in programming mode receiving a paging announcement over the built in speaker 82 Features Guide General Features e IfDPT SLT are used the extension user cannot originate a call from the SLT if the DPT is in programming mode e Call Waiting Tone Call Waiting tone rings at PT only Installation Manual References e 2 4 12 Parallel Connection of the Extensions Programming Guide References e 1 4 Extension Port Assignment Parallel XDP DHLC card Parallel XDP HLC card Features Guide References 1 1 System Expansion e EXtra Device Port XDP User Manual References e 4 3 59 Paralleled Telephone Connection Features Guide 83 General Features Phantom Extension Description This allows the system to route the calls to a phantom extension The call to a phantom extension arrives at the extension who has the corresponding Phantom button One phantom extension number can be assigned to multiple extensions so that the caller can ring a group of
209. ls are available at a time by default If the optional TSW Conference Expansion card is installed up to 64 conference calls are available simultaneously Executive Busy Override Privacy Release A 3 party call is also established by Executive Busy Override or Privacy Release Confirmation tone When a 2 party call is changed to a 3 party conference call and vice versa a confirmation tone is sent to all three parties Eliminating the tone is programmable lt Section 2 8 System Option 8 Confirmation tone for Override Barge in Conference and Privacy Release in the Programming Guide gt e CONF Conference button If a CONF button is not provided on a PT it can be assigned to a flexible CO DSS PF button by Station User or System Programming e Call Splitting During a 3 party conference call the conference originator can talk to either one of other two parties alternately by pressing the TRANSFER button for PT user or flashing the switchhook for SLT user In this case the PT user is connected with the latter party first and the SLT user is connected with the previous party first e Released Link Operation If Released Link Operation is enabled at an SLT lt Section 2 4 Class of Service COS Released Link Operation in the Programming Guide gt a conference call cannot be established 266 Features Guide General Features Programming Guide References e 2 4 Class of Service COS Released Link Operation
210. ment e 4 3 21 Conference 3 Party e 4 3 63 Privacy Release 280 Features Guide General Features Privacy Automatic Description By default all conversations established on CO lines extension lines and doorphone lines have privacy activated that is an existing call is not interrupted by anyone Conditions e Privacy Release Automatic privacy may be temporarily released to establish a 3 party conference call either by Executive Busy Override or Privacy Release Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Executive Busy Override 1 12 Conversation Features e Privacy Release User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 281 General Features Pulse to Tone Conversion Description Allows the extension user to change the dialing mode from pulse dial to tone dial DTMF temporarily during a call so that they can access special services which require tone dialing such as a computer accessed long distance call Conditions e This feature works only for CO lines set to Pulse Dialing mode e Dial Type Selection provides selection of a dial mode for each CO line e DISA call This feature is not available during a DISA call e Changing from tone to pulse is not possible Programming Guide References e 4 2 Trunk Line Dial Type Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Dial Type Selection User Man
211. ming e FWD DND button Regarding the PT without the FWD DND button it can be assigned to a flexible CO DSS PF button by Station User or System Programming e A PT user in DND mode can answer a call by pressing a flashing button which shows the arrival of the call e Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone dial tone 2 after going off hook depending on System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 15 Special dial tone after setting feature in the Programming Guide gt 216 Features Guide General Features Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Call FWD Do Not Disturb Set Cancel 2 4 Class of Service COS DND Override e 2 8 System Option Special dial tone after setting feature FWD DND lamp pattern e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key PF Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key PF Key Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Remote Station Feature Control 1 6 Originating Features e Do Not Disturb DND Override 1 11 Transferring Features e Call Forwarding User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 4 3 27 Do Not Disturb DND 4 3 28 Do Not Disturb DND Override e 4 4 7 Remote DND Do Not Disturb Control Features Guide 217 General Features Log In Log Out Description Allows the extension
212. moderate flash You have one of the following 1 Exclusive hold 2 CO to CO line call 3 Conference unattended Green rapid flash Hold Recall A CO call is coming in on a single extension Red On All CO lines within the trunk group are in use Red slow flash Red moderate flash Red rapid flash A CO call is coming in on multiple extensions simultaneously Features Guide General Features LED Indication and the line status L CO button LED Indication Line Status Off Idle Green On You are using the line Green slow flash You have a held call Green moderate flash You have one of the following 1 Exclusive hold 2 CO to CO line call 3 Conference unattended Green rapid flash Hold Recall A CO call is coming in on a single extension Red On Red slow flash Red moderate flash Red rapid flash A CO call is coming in on multiple extensions simultaneously LED Indication and the line status PDN button LED Indication Line Status Off Idle Green On You are using the line Green slow flash You have a held call Green moderate flash You have one of the following 1 Exclusive hold 2 Consultation hold 3 Conference unattended Green rapid flash A CO call is coming in on a single extension Hold Recall Automatic Callback Busy Incoming doorphone call Privacy Release
213. music sources can be installed in the system e To make BGM External possible you must enable BGM and select a music source by System Programming lt Section 4 6 External Paging in the Programming Guide gt External Pager Priority Priority of access to external pager is 1 TAFAS 2 Paging 3 BGM Higher priorities will override the BGM Installation Manual References e 2 8 1 External Pager Paging Equipment e 2 8 2 External Music Source Programming Guide References e 2 2 Tenant BGM Source e 2 3 Numbering Plan External BGM On Off e 4 6 External Paging BGM BGM Source Features Guide References 1 15 Proprietary Telephone Features e Background Music BGM User Manual References e 4 4 2 Background Music BGM External Features Guide 21 General Features Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection Description The Calling Party Control CPC Signal is an on hook indication disconnect signal sent from the Central Office when the telephone is hung up at the other end To maintain efficient utilization of CO lines the system monitors their status and when CPC Signal is detected from a line the system disconnects the line and alerts the extension with a reorder tone Conditions e This feature is enabled or disabled on incoming and outgoing CO calls separately by System Programming e CPC Signal Detection on outgoing CO calls Generally CPC Signal Detection works on incomin
214. n Call Pickup Deny mode a call which shows the call arrival indication but is not ringing yet Delayed Ringing e With the KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 you can execute this feature using the display operation Directed e Tenant Service If Tenant Service is utilized this feature is only available for the calls ringing on an extension within the same tenant e Doorphone Call Doorphone calls can be picked up from extensions that are not programmed to answer doorphone calls e Call Waiting Call This feature applies to a call waiting call Group e Group Call Pickup Priority Outside call gt Transferred call gt Extension call gt Doorphone call 230 Features Guide General Features e If more than one call is ringing on an extension Call Pickup to that extension works for the first arrived call e Call Waiting Call This feature does not apply to a call waiting call CO Line e Tenant Service If Tenant Service is utilized this feature is only available for an outside call ringing on an extension within the same tenant e If more than one CO call is ringing on an extension Call Pickup starts with the first arrived CO call e Call Waiting Call This feature does not apply to a call waiting call Deny e This feature does not apply to calls coming in on multiple extensions simultaneously e Applicable calls This feature applies to the following calls Call Type Outside calls
215. n extension number and a name if programmed are shown on the display PT during an intercom call Features Guide General Features Programming Guide References e 1 4 Extension Port Assignment Attribute Tel Type DN e 2 2 Tenant Inter tenant Calling 1 8 e 2 3 Numbering Plan Ist Hundred Block Extension 2nd Hundred Block Extension 3rd Hundred Block Extension 4th Hundred Block Extension 5th Hundred Block Extension 6th Hundred Block Extension 7th Hundred Block Extension 8th Hundred Block Extension 9th Hundred Block Extension 10th Hundred Block Extension 11th Hundred Block Extension 16th Hundred Block Extension e 4 3 Extension Line Name CO Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key e 4 7 ISDN Extension Line Name Features Guide References 1 16 Button Features e Button Direct Station Selection DSS e Button Line Access 1 17 Display Features e Busy Lamp Field User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment 3 2 4 004 Extension Name Set e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 42 Inter Office Calling Features Guide 171 General Features Line Preference Outgoing Idle Line No Line Prime Line Description A PT user can select a desired outgoing line preference to originate calls from the following three line preferences a Idle Line Preference When an extension user goes off hook to make a call
216. nager Extension DN Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Remote Station Feature Control e Remote Station Lock Control User Manual References e 4 4 Operator Manager Service Features Features Guide 65 General Features Mixed Station Capabilities Description The KX TD500 system supports a wide range of telephone sets as follows Digital Proprietary Telephones DPTs Analog Proprietary Telephones APTs Single Line Rotary Telephones Dial Pulse Signaling Single Line Touch Tone Telephones Tone Dialing ISDN Telephones The super hybrid method used in this system allows any telephone to be connected to an extension port without a special adaptor Extension cards and compatible terminals Card Terminal gt DSS Proprietary SLT ISDN Console Telephone Telephone DPT APT HLC KX T96170 v v v PLC KX T96172 v v SLC KX T96174 v SLC M KX T96175 v DHLC KX TD50170 v v v v DLC KX TD50172 v ESLC KX TD50175 v BRI KX TD50288 v PRI23 KX TD50290 V YY indicates that the extension card is available for the terminal Conditions 66 e Ifatelephone is replaced by another one the stored data such as feature button storage is held for the new one Features Guide General Features Installation Manual References e 2 4 Extension Cards e 2 5 6 BRI Card KX TD50288 e 2 5 7 PRI23 Card KX TD50290 Programming Gu
217. nant Manager Extension DN 2 3 Numbering Plan OGM Playback Record 3 6 OGM Group FDN Tenant No OGM Type Features Guide 79 General Features Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Outgoing Message OGM Group 1 5 Attended Features e Direct Inward System Access DISA e Uniform Call Distribution UCD 1 8 Ringing Features e Timed Reminder Wake Up Call e Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call User Manual References e 4 4 6 Outgoing Message OGM Record Playback 80 Features Guide General Features Outgoing Message OGM Group Description OGM resources on the DISA card can be grouped together as an OGM Group Up to eight OGM Groups can be created in the system Conditions Tenant Service If Tenant Service is employed the affiliation of OGM Group should be decided by System Programming Installation Manual References e 2 6 1 DISA Card KX T96191 Programming Guide References e 1 7 DISA Port Assignment e 3 6 OGM Group FDN Tenant No OGM Type Security Mode DISA built in Automated Attendant Tables Dial 0 Dial 9 Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Outgoing Message OGM User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 81 General Features Paralleled Telephone Description Any PT can be connected in parallel with an SLT The following two combinations of telephones are available a APT
218. nant Music on Hold Source BGM Source 2 8 System Option Sound source during transfer Features Guide References 1 10 Holding Features e Call Hold e Consultation Hold 1 15 Proprietary Telephone Features 68 e Background Music BGM Features Guide General Features User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 69 General Features Night Service Description The system supports both Night and Day modes of operation in a different arrangement The Day mode includes the Lunch and Break mode Only a DIL destination can perform in Lunch Break mode And any other feature can perform in Day mode The system operation for originating and receiving calls can be different for day and night modes For example the system operation for restricting toll calls can be arranged separately to prevent unauthorized toll calls at night Switching the Day Night Lunch Break Mode Day Night Lunch Break mode can be switched either automatically or manually Switching Type Description Automatic The system will switch the Day Night Lunch Break mode at the programmed time each day The starting time of the Day Night Lunch Break mode can be set for each day by System Programming lt Section 2 2 Tenant Auto Start Time in the Programming Guide gt Manual The extension allowed by COS Class of Service programming the Manager and the Operator can switch the Day Night
219. nation immediately If the IRNA destination is not programmed the call is kept waiting with a ringback tone Installation Manual References 2 6 1 DISA Card KX T96191 2 6 3 RMT Card KX T96196 2 6 4 ERMT Card KX TD50197 Features Guide 131 General Features Programming Guide References 1 7 DISA Port Assignment 2 3 Numbering Plan OGM Playback Record 2 4 Class of Service COS TRS Level Day Night 2 5 System Timer Call Forwarding No Answer Time CO to CO Line Call Duration Time DISA Prolong Time DISA Delayed Answer Time DISA Automated Attendant Time DISA IRNA Time Intercept Timer after OGM 2 7 Trunk to Trunk Restriction 2 8 System Option DISA prolong operation Dialing in DISA CO to CO talking Destination Busy DISA Illegal Number DISA 3 2 Trunk Group Intercept Destination Day Night Cyclic Signal Detection Continuous Signal Detection Silence Detection 3 6 OGM Group FDN Tenant No OGM Type Security Mode DISA built in Automated Attendant Tables Dial 0 Dial 9 4 2 Trunk Line Incoming Type Destination Day Night Lunch Break CPC Signal OUT Detection CPC Signal OUT Detection Detection Time CPC Signal IN Detection CPC Signal IN Detection Detection Time 4 3 Extension Line Intercept Destination Day Night 5 9 DISA TIE User Code Code COS Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Outgoing Message OGM 132 Features Gui
220. nces System Programming is not required Features Guide References None 306 Features Guide General Features User Manual References e 2 Station Programming e 4 4 3 Call Log Incoming Log Lock e 4 4 4 Live Call Screening LCS Password Clear e 4 4 9 Remote Station Lock Control Features Guide 307 General Features Station Programming Data Default Set Description Allows the PT user to return all the following items programmed on the telephone to default setting Programming Items Default Bilingual Display Selection English Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment Tone 1 Full One Touch Dialing Assignment On Handset Headset Selection Handset Initial Display Selection Caller ID Intercom Alert Assignment Tone Call Live Call Screening Mode Set Hands free Preferred Line Assignment Incoming Ringing Line Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing Intercom Line Station Programming is used to set or cancel these items at individual telephones Conditions None Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References 1 15 Proprietary Telephone Features e Station Programming User Manual References e 2 2 16 Station Programming Data Default Set 308 Features Guide General Features Volume Control Speaker Handset Receiver Headset Ringer Description Allows the PT user to change the following as desired H
221. nces e 2 4 Extension Cards e 2 5 Trunk Cards e 2 9 1 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer Programming Guide References e 10 5 Power Failure Transfer Features Guide References 1 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics e Power Failure Re Start User Manual References Not applicable 116 Features Guide General Features 1 5 Attended Features Caller ID Service Description Provides the display PT user with a caller s information such as name and telephone number sent from the Central Office over the CO line assigned to receive Caller ID service calls Conditions e A special arrangement is required with the telephone company to utilize the Caller ID Service Hardware Requirements To utilize this feature ELCOT card KX TD50180 and Caller ID card KX TD193 are required e Caller ID Number and Name Registration Up to 1000 entries of number and name for Caller ID Service can be programmed either by User or System Programming Tenant Service If Tenant Service is employed up to 2000 entries of number and name for Caller ID Service can be shared among each tenant under the condition of up to 1000 entries per tenant e If neither the telephone number nor the name is stored in the Caller ID Table the number sent from Caller ID service is displayed e Ifthe network provides a telephone number only the system searches for the matching name for the number from the Caller ID Table and displays both of th
222. ncoming CO call to go directly to one or more answering points without assistance of the operator Assignable destinations are 1 Extension 2 Floating Extension Modem Remote Administration External Pager TAFAS OGM Group DISA message Extension Group Incoming Group Phantom Extension DIL can have different destinations for day night lunch break modes Night Service Features Guide 121 General Features Outline sketch of Direct In Lines DIL Extension DN Modem Remote Maintenance DIL External Pager TAFAS Floating Extension __ FDN OGM Group DISA message Hunting Group Terminate Extension Group Hunting Group Circular Ring Group Operator Group VM Voice Mail Group AA Automated Attendant Group UCD Group DIL 1 N Group Incoming Group Hunting Group Terminate Ring Group Phantom Extensions Operator Group UCD Group Conditions e DIL to the modem allows the caller to perform remote administration When receiving incoming calls TAFAS feature DIL pages an external pager DIL to DISA message allows an external caller to access the system directly DISA feature Programming Guide References e 4 2 Trunk Line Incoming Type Destination Day Night Lunch Break 122 Features Guide General Features Features Guide References None User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 123 General Features Direct I
223. ned to a flexible CO DSS PF button by Station User or System Programming e Ifthe other party you called is in one of the following status You can terminate the current call and call a new party by pressing the FLASH button the other party does not answer the call the other party refuses to join a Five party conference all the other party is a Voice Mail extension Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Call Park Call Park Retrieve e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key PF Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key PF Key Features Guide References 1 10 Holding Features e Call Park 1 12 Conversation Features e Conference 3 Party 268 Features Guide General Features User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 21 Conference 3 Party e 4 3 22 Conference 5 Party Features Guide 269 General Features Conference Unattended Description A PT user who originated a conference call with two outside parties can leave the conference for a while to allow the other two parties to continue conversation This is called an Unattended Conference The conference originator may return to the conference if desired Conditions e Class of Service COS programming An Unattended Conference cannot be established unless the extension is allowed to transfer a call to an outside party by COS programming lt Section 2 4 Clas
224. ng lt Section 2 8 System Option Alert Ringing in the Programming Guide gt Installation Manual References e 2 6 1 DISA Card KX T96191 Programming Guide References e 2 2 Tenant Alert Extension Day Night e 2 3 Numbering Plan Timed Reminder Remote 2 5 System Timer Timed Reminder Ringing Time Timed Reminder Arrive Count Timed Reminder Arrive Wait Time e 2 8 System Option Special dial tone after setting feature Alert Ringing e 3 6 OGM Group OGM Type e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key e 10 4 SMDR Print out Timed Reminder Information e 10 7 System Time Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Outgoing Message OGM e Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 1 8 Ringing Features e Timed Reminder Wake Up Call User Manual References 3 2 1 000 Date and Time Set e 4 4 6 Outgoing Message OGM Record Playback e 4 4 11 Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call 226 Features Guide General Features 1 9 Answering Features ANSWER and RELEASE buttons Operation Description ANSWER and RELEASE buttons are useful when using the headset or in hands free mode With the ANSWER button an extension user can answer all incoming calls With the RELEASE button an extension user can disconnect the line during or after a conversation or complete a Call Transfer Conditions ANSWER and RELEASE Buttons Assignment ANSWER and RELEASE buttons are provided as a fixed
225. ng Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Door Open e 2 5 System Timer Door Opener Time e 4 5 Doorphone Destination Day Night Features Guide References 1 12 Conversation Features e Doorphone Call User Manual References e 4 3 29 Doorphone Call 28 Features Guide General Features Extension Group Description To support efficient utilization of extensions they can be grouped together as an Extension Group Any extension in the Extension Group can pick up a call ringing at another extension within the same Extension Group Call Pickup Group Extension Group is used to direct incoming calls both extension and outside to a group of answering extensions associated with the type of incoming calls Up to 128 Extension Groups can be created in the system The following seven different types of Extension Group can be created Group Type Description Terminate If the called extension is busy Station Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle extension within the same Extension Group The extensions are searched in the order of the extension port physical numbers Installing additional cards may change the order until reaching the extension with the highest physical number in the group Station Hunting Group Terminate Circular If the called extension is busy Station Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle extension within the same Extension Group
226. ng Guide gt Trunk Route Control When the outside call made using a specific trunk is busy on another call the Manager or the Operators can join the existing outside call by dialing 2 after hearing a busy tone Barge In e lt DN type PT gt This feature is available when one extension has an SDN button associated with the PDN button of the other e The pre assigned extension users can interrupt an existing outside call even if access to that line is not allowed by System Programming 168 Features Guide General Features Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Data Line Security Set Cancel Executive Busy Override Deny Set Cancel Trunk Route Control e 2 4 Class of Service COS Busy Override Busy Override Deny e 2 8 System Option Confirmation tone for Override Barge in Conference and Privacy Release Features Guide References 1 9 Answering Features e Executive Busy Override Deny 1 12 Conversation Features e Conference 3 Party User Manual References e 4 3 21 Conference 3 Party e 4 3 25 Data Line Security e 4 3 33 Executive Busy Override e 4 3 34 Executive Busy Override Deny e 4 4 13 Trunk Route Control Features Guide 169 General Features Inter Office Calling Description Allows the extension user to call another extension user within the system or a tenant An inter office call is a call between two extensions in the KX TD500 system Conditi
227. ng call b Prime Line Preference An extension user can assign a prime line beforehand and answer a call ringing on that line simply by lifting the handset even when multiple calls are ringing on his extension simultaneously A Prime Line can be selected from the following line access buttons lt ICM type PT gt ICM S CO G CO L CO lt DN type PT gt PDN SDN S CO G CO L CO c Ringing Line Preference default An extension user can answer the call ringing at his extension simply by going off hook Conditions e Setting a new line preference feature cancels the previous setting e If Prime Line Preference is selected an incoming call coming from a line other than the prime line cannot be answered just by going off hook To answer the call the extension user must press the flashing button associated with the ringing line e Delayed Ringing If Ringing Line Preference is selected going off hook does not answer a line programmed for no ring even though there is an incoming call Going off hook during the delay time does not answer a line programmed for delayed ringing e lt SLT gt An SLT is fixed to Ringing Line Preference mode Programming Guide References e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key Preferred Line Incoming Features Guide References None Features Guide 239 General Features User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment 2 2 11 Preferred Line Assignment Incoming e 3 2 5
228. ns General e This feature does not work if the PT extension already has a call placed on Consultation Hold e If this feature is disabled by System Programming performing One Touch Transfer operation disconnects the current call e The PT user can talk to the party on hold again by pressing the button associated with that extension before the destination extension answers the call One Touch Transfer by DSS or Phantom e COS programming lt Section 2 4 Class of Service COS Automatic Hold in the Programming Guide gt determines the extension that can perform this feature One Touch Transfer by DSS e This feature can be enabled or disabled on a system wide basis by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 25 Pressing DSS key operation in CO talking gt Programming Guide References e 2 4 Class of Service COS Automatic Hold e 2 8 System Option Pressing DSS key operation in CO talking Features Guide 263 General Features Features Guide References 1 10 Holding Features e Automatic Hold For Hold User Manual References e 4 3 16 Call Transfer e 5 2 25 Call Transfer 264 Features Guide General Features Ringing Transfer Description If the Extension 1001 has an SDN button which corresponds with the PDN button of the Extension 2001 PDN owner the Extension 1001 can transfer the call on the SDN button to the Extension 2001 with a simple operation This is called
229. nsions are using one of the KX T7400 series PTs e Data Line Security Setting Data Line Security temporarily cancels Call Waiting which has been turned on by an extension user e BSS OHCA and Whisper OHCA do not function if the other extension is a DN type PT e Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone dial tone 2 after going off hook depending on System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 15 Special dial tone after setting feature in the Programming Guide gt Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Call Waiting Set Cancel 2 4 Class of Service COS Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA e 2 8 System Option Special dial tone after setting feature e 4 3 Extension Line Call Waiting Tone Type 234 Features Guide General Features Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Busy Station Signaling BSS e Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA e Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper 1 12 Conversation Features e Data Line Security User Manual References e 2 2 2 Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment e 4 3 8 Busy Station Signaling BSS e 4 3 17 Call Waiting e 4 3 25 Data Line Security 4 3 49 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA e 4 3 50 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper Features Guide 235 General Features Call Waiting from Central Office Description Dur
230. nt Code Entry mode setting emergency numbers can be dialed out without entering an account code Account button The Account button can be used instead of dialing the feature number It can be assigned to a flexible CO DSS PF button by Station User or System Programming The account code used for making a CO call is memorized in the following auto dial memories Last Number Redial Saved Number Redial Call Log Outgoing SLT users cannot enter an account code during a call or while hearing a reorder tone Programming Guide References 2 3 Numbering Plan Account Code 2 4 Class of Service COS Account Code Mode 4 3 Extension Line CO Key PF Key 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key PF Key 5 6 Account Code Tenant No Entry No Code TRS Level 10 4 SMDR Print out Account Code Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 1 6 Originating Features e Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry User Manual References 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 4 3 2 Account Code Entry 4 3 76 Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry Features Guide 17 General Features Automatic Calling Cancel Description If this feature is enabled the system automatically disconnects the CO line in use when the CO call is not answered in a specified period of time Conditions e This feature applies
231. nual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 2 2 12 Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Features Guide 173 General Features Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Description OHCA allows the extension user to inform a busy extension engaged in a call using the handset that another call is waiting by talking through the built in speaker of the busy extension s PT If the existing call is performed over the handset the second conversation is made with the speakerphone so that the called extension can talk to two parties independently OHCA is performed the same way as Busy Station Signaling BSS It depends on the telephone type of the called party whether BSS or OHCA is activated by the operation If the called extension is KX T7130 KX T7235 or KX T7436 OHCA becomes active Conditions e Call Waiting OHCA is only effective when the called extension has set Call Waiting If not the caller will hear a reorder tone after dialing the extension number e BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA If an extension user dials 1 while hearing a busy tone BSS or OHCA or Whisper OHCA will be activated at the called extension This is determined by the following conditions Calling extension Called extension Call Waiting setting COS OHCA f OFF ON assignment 0 1 2 3 Disable BSS BSS BSS W OHCA Enable BSS OHCA BSS OHCA BSS OHC
232. number 63 Quick dial location number 1 in program Numbering Plan c Assign 1001 in location number 1 in program Quick Dialing same location number as the quick dial location number 1 in program Numbering Plan Now quick dial number 3 is available to call extension 1001 Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Quick dial 1 Quick dial 8 e 5 5 Quick Dialing Features Guide References None User Manual References e 3 2 9 009 Quick Dial Number Set e 4 3 65 Quick Dialing 210 Features Guide General Features Redial Description Redial feature can be categorized as the following two types Type Description Last Number Saves the last telephone number dialed to a CO line or while hearing a busy tone and allows the extension user to dial the same number again Saved Number Allows the PT user to save a telephone number while in conversation on a CO line or while hearing a busy tone and redial the number afterwards The saved number can be redialed until another number is stored Conditions General e Up to 24 digits excluding the CO line access code can be stored and redialed e If Full One Touch Dialing feature is enabled at the extension there is no need to go off hook before pressing the REDIAL or SAVE button Last Number e The memorized telephone number is replaced by a new one if at least one digit sent toa CO line is dialed Dialing a CO line a
233. nward Dialing DID Description Allows incoming CO calls to reach a specific extension a virtual extension or a group of extensions in the system directly in accordance with the subscriber number sent from the Central Office Possible destination of DID calls Extension user e Extension Group e External Pager TAFAS e Incoming Group e Modem Remote Administration e OGM Group DISA message e Phantom extension e Other PBX extension Call Flow Receives the subscriber number from the Central Office via a DID line Modifies the subscriber number according to DID Digits Modification Determines the destination DN or FDN according to DID Dial Registration DID Digits Modification Procedures The System modifies the subscriber number according to the following three parameters 1 Digit to receive DID The number of digits effective in the received subscriber number 2 Digits to delete The number of digits to be deleted from the beginning of the digits processed in Step 1 3 Number to be added The dials to be inserted at the beginning of the digits processed in Step 2 124 Features Guide General Features Example Digit to receive DID 4 digits Digits to delete 1 digit Number to be added 2 The System modifies the received subscriber number 4311 into 2311 as follows Processed in Step 2 4311 311 The first digit 4 was deleted This results in 311 Processed in Step 3 311 2311 The
234. ogramming Guide The following shows how to program ARS so that the extension user can call the XYZ Company via the least expensive line Step 1 To utilize ARS feature set Automatic Route Selection in System Tenant to Yes Step 2 Store the telephone number of the outside party that will use the ARS feature For example if XYZ Company s telephone number is 1 234 567 8910 not including the line access code store the leading 7 digits of the number 1234567 and associated Routing Plan No 01 for example in ARS Leading Digits Table Table A Example ARS Leading Digits Table Entry Dial Routing Plan No No 001 1234567 01 002 800 Step 3 Check all carriers available to call the stored telephone number and their Trunk Groups Supposing that there are three carriers available to call the XYZ Company and each carrier s line is assigned to a Trunk Group as follows Carrier E Trunk Group 1 Carrier F Trunk Group 2 Carrier G Trunk Group 3 Then check the fee charged by each carrier 156 Features Guide General Features Table B Carrier G Carrier F BO EEE ED nn emcee eminent ESSEN EN ESTER REN OOE 12 3 6 9 12 3 6 9 12 3 6 9 12 3 6 9 a m p m a m p m Sat Sun Mon Fri As shown in Table B the least costly route varies with the day of the week and the time of day To select the least expensive line at a ce
235. om the message receiver Sending out Follow on ID after FWD Used to determine whether to send or not the Follow on ID after an outside call is forwarded to a VM extension Sending out Follow on ID after IRNA Used to determine whether to send or not the Follow on ID after an outside call is redirected to a VM extension by IRNA feature Installation Manual References 2 4 Extension Cards Features Guide 57 General Features Programming Guide References e 1 4 Extension Port Assignment Group No e 1 5 VPS DPT Port Assignment e 2 3 Numbering Plan Message Waiting Set Cancel Call Back Call FWD Do Not Disturb Set Cancel Login Logout e 3 3 Extension Group FDN Tenant No Overflow Setting Destination Day Night Group Type e 4 2 Trunk Line Destination Day Night Lunch Break e 4 3 Extension Line Group No Name Mailbox No CO Key COS No Primary COS No Secondary LCS Setting Status LCS Setting Operation Mode LCS Setting Recording Mode LCS Setting LCS Password e 44 DSS Console DSS Key e 5 10 VPS Integration Voice Mail Command Leave Message Voice Mail Command Get Message Voice Mail Command AA Service Voice Mail Command VM Service Turn off control of Message Waiting lamp Extension s mailbox number Sending out Follow on ID after FWD Sending out Follow on ID after IRNA Features Guide Ref
236. on Destination Busy DID Illegal Number DID VM Trunk Service for DID 3 2 Trunk Group Intercept Destination Day Night 4 2 Trunk Line Group No Incoming Type DID TIE Digits to delete DID TIE Number to be added Digit to receive DID Start Signal Type 4 3 Extension Line Intercept Destination Day Night 9 2 DID Dial Registration DID MDN No Tenant No VPS Trunk Group No Destination Day Night Name Features Guide References 1 3 System Features 126 e Floating Station Features Guide General Features 1 17 Display Features e Display Call Information User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 127 General Features Direct Inward System Access DISA Description Allows an outside caller to access specific system features without operator assistance as if the caller is an extension user in the system The outside caller can have direct access to features such as e Placing an intercom call to an extension modem for remote administration external pager for TAFAS Phantom extension Extension Group or Incoming Group except DIL 1 N Group DISA built in Automated Attendant A DISA caller can access the desired extension simply by dialing a one digit code e Calling an outside party To control the DISA caller s calling ability one of the following three Security modes can be assigned on an OGM Group
237. on e 10 4SMDR Print out Caller ID Information Features Guide References 1 5 Attended Features e Caller ID Service User Manual References e 4 4 3 Call Log Incoming Log Lock 4 4 9 Remote Station Lock Control e 4 5 4 Call Log Incoming KX T7436 KX T7433 KX T7235 KX T7230 only e 4 5 5 Call Log Incoming Log Lock KX T7436 KX T7433 KX T7235 KX T7230 only 336 Features Guide General Features Call Log Outgoing Description Provides a KX T7436 and KX T7235 display of the last five outside telephone numbers up to 24 digits for each dialed at the extension This allows the extension user to redial the number by pressing the Function button associated with the telephone number This is an extended version of Last Number Redial Conditions e If the Call Log is full when a new outside call is made the oldest telephone number is overwritten by a new one Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References 1 7 Dialing Features e Redial User Manual References e 4 5 6 Call Log Outgoing KX T7436 KX T7235 only Features Guide 337 General Features Display Contrast Adjustment Description Allows the display PT user to adjust the display contrast The adjusting method differs depending on the type of PT DPT Soft buttons and Volume button are used to adjust the contrast to one of three levels APT A sliding lever CONTRAST selector
238. on off by pressing 1 while the extension is on hook If it goes off hook BGM is suspended temporarily e Changing Music Source Before changing the music source MUS1 or MUS2 by software control you must first turn off the BGM at your extension change the source and then turn on the BGM again e Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone dial tone 2 after going off hook depending on System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 15 Special dial tone after setting feature in the Programming Guide gt Installation Manual References 2 8 2 External Music Source Programming Guide References e 2 2 Tenant BGM Source e 2 8 System Option Special dial tone after setting feature Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Background Music BGM External e Music on Hold 296 Features Guide General Features User Manual References e 4 3 7 Background Music BGM Features Guide 297 General Features DSS Console Description 298 The DSS Direct Station Selection Console KX T7040 KX T7240 KX T7440 KX T7441 provides DSS buttons for direct access to stations and busy lamp display and PF Programmable Feature buttons The DSS Console must be programmed to work with a PT in pairs System Programming assigns the extension port numbers of the DSS Console and its associated PT Up to 8 DSS Consoles can
239. on Programming e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key PF Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key PF Key Features Guide References 1 7 Dialing Features e Full One Touch Dialing User Manual References e 2 2 17 Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment KX T7235 KX T743 1 KX T7433 KX T7436 only e 4 3 72 Station Speed Dialing Features Guide 213 General Features System Speed Dialing Description The KX TD500 system provides up to 1000 tenant 2000 system abbreviated speed dial numbers 24 digit long for each available to all extension users Conditions e System Speed Dialing numbers and names can be programmed either by User or System Programming e Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing Overriding Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialing can be activated or deactivated per tenant by System Programming e Tenant Service If Tenant Service is employed up to 2000 Speed Dialing codes can be shared among each tenant under the condition of up to 1000 codes per tenant e lt For PT users gt Speed Dialing One Touch Dialing manual dialing Last Number Redial and Saved Number Redial can be used in combinations e lt For SLT users gt If a stored feature number includes or rotary or pulse SLTs cannot use it e You can import System Speed Dialing data by uploading the database file using the PC Maintenance Console It enables you to register a lot of System Speed Dialing data easily If
240. on between an extension user and a visitor at a door When a visitor presses the doorphone button pre assigned destination extensions ring The extension who answered the call can talk to the visitor It is possible for any extension user to call a doorphone Conditions Hardware Requirements To utilize this feature aDPH Card KX T96161 and a Doorphone are required The System supports up to eight doorphones e Doorphone Call Destination It is necessary to program the extensions that can receive doorphone calls during day and night mode e What if a doorphone call is not answered If not answered within 30 seconds the call stops ringing and is canceled e Unlocking the door opener During a doorphone call any extension user can unlock the door opener user supplied from his extension by dialing 5 to let the visitor in e The extension user cannot hold and transfer the doorphone call Installation Manual References e 2 7 3 DPH Card KX T96161 Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Doorphone Call e 2 5 System Timer Door Opener Time e 4 5 Doorphone Destination Day Night Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Door Opener User Manual References e 4 3 29 Doorphone Call Features Guide 273 General Features End to End DTMF Signaling Tone Through Description DTME signaling is required for access to special network services offered by some telephone compani
241. on the telephone is used to select one of three levels Conditions None Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References None User Manual References e 1 1 5 Initial Setting for KX T7400 Series e 1 1 6 Initial Setting for KX T7200 Series 338 Features Guide General Features Display Call Information Description The display PT shows the extension user the following call information Extension number and name These are shown when calling or called by an extension user and during an established intercom call A display example 123 Tony Viola Dialed telephone number This is shown when dialing the telephone number A display example 1234567890 Number or name of the caller These are shown if the Caller ID feature is available Display examples 10101 1234567890 10101 Panasonic CO Line number and name This is shown when receiving a CO call A display example 10101 AB COMPANY DID DID ISDN number and name These are shown when receiving a DID DID ISDN call Display examples DID Tony Viola When Name is registered 10101 CO001 When Name is not registered Call duration of outside call This is shown during an established CO call The display remains for 5 seconds after the call is finished A display example 10101 0 02 28 Doorphone No This is shown when receiving or making a doorphone call A display example Doorphone 1
242. on u 2 8222 dan ales nr ing 339 Display D teandTime 2u2 e2 22 82 Beeren 341 Display Self Extension Number 22 2200220020ssnnessensnnennnensensnnsnnesnnensnnnnsnennen nme 342 Message Walings roenn Searing cease cae rie ee eee ea ote 343 Special Display Features u aa ann ea se 345 System Feature Access Menu uuessenssssnessnessnessennnnnnnennnennesnnennnenneensennnessnnenennnnann 346 2 ISDN Fear e6 sis cisvececessccecceccssnscsccecsoncecctactaacasdsecectcussccacsecsensteasecasse D4 2 1 2 2 Features Guide ISDN FeatureS ccscsscsscsccsccesssscscsscescssessccsscsseseseesesssssssessesecssesscssssssssseesersesessees 350 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN 22u2220222snanensensennennnennne nn 350 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Extension uussessnrnnesnnnesnennenennn 354 ISDN Originating Features c00u00000s0sossonsnsensnnnenonennnnsnnnssnsnnnsnnsnnnnsnsennnsnsnssssnnnnenee 356 Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP senennsensnnnn 356 Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR uuseesseennnnsennnnennsennnnnen 358 Calling Name Identification Presentation CNIP ennensennsenennn 360 7 Table of Contents 2 3 3 3 1 4 5 Calling Name Identification Restriction CNIR ssnnnsenneennsennnnnnen 361 ISDN Attended Features ccsccscsscssssescsc
243. on without lifting the handset or pressing the SP PHONE MONITOR button This feature permits the extension user to answer the desired CO call when multiple incoming CO calls are coming in on his extension Conditions None Programming Guide References e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key Features Guide References 1 16 Button Features e Button Line Access User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 5 Answering Direct Trunk e 4 3 41 Hands free Operation Features Guide 229 General Features Call Pickup Description Allows the extension user to answer a call intercom outside doorphone ringing at any other extension The following types are available Feature Type Picking up call type Directed A specific extension s call Group A call within your extension group CO Line An outside call Preventing other extensions from picking up calls ringing at his extension is also possible Call Pickup Deny Conditions General Confirmation Tone A confirmation tone is sent to the extension user who picked up the call Eliminating the tone is programmable lt Section 2 8 System Option 9 Confirmation tone for Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Answer Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve in the Programming Guide gt e This feature is not available to answer the following calls a call ringing at an extension i
244. one Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Trunk Busy out e 2 8 System Option ELCOT LCOT Busy out Loop Relay GCOT Busy out Loop Relay Features Guide References None 106 Features Guide General Features User Manual References e 4 4 12 Trunk Busy Out Setting Features Guide 107 General Features Trunk Group Description All CO lines and TIE lines in the system can be grouped into up to 48 Trunk Groups This allows extension users to call outside parties without designating a specific CO line since a CO line is automatically selected from the designated Trunk Group All CO lines belonging to a Trunk Group follow the assignment determined for that Trunk Group Conditions To support efficient utilization of trunks it is desirable to group them together in trunk groups according to a type of each trunk Incoming Only Outgoing Only Both Way etc determined by the contract with the Central Office e Each CO line can only belong to one Trunk Group e Line Hunting Order An idle CO line in a trunk group is selected in one of the following three line hunting orders a Normal The system connects the user to an idle trunk line with the lowest trunk port physical number b Reverse default The system connects the user to an idle trunk line with the highest trunk port physical number c Sequential To avoid repeated use of the same trunk line rotation is performed in numerical or
245. one or rotary is converted to rotary dialing Rotary pulses are transmitted to the CO line Conditions e Pulse to Tone Conversion The extension user can convert the pre assigned rotary dialing mode to DTMF mode temporarily DTMF mode cannot be changed to rotary e DISA Either DTMF or rotary dialing can be assigned for the DISA Direct Inward System Access outgoing line With DISA Pulse to Tone Conversion is not possible e If you specify Pulse as Dial Type of a trunk line select an appropriate pulse speed pulse break ratio and inter digit pause for the line if necessary If you specify DTME select an appropriate DTMF duration for the line in Card Properties screen if necessary Please refer to Card Type of Section 1 2 Slot Assignment in the Programming Guide for further information on Card Properties Programming Guide References e 1 2 Slot Assignment e 4 2 Trunk Line Dial Type Features Guide References 1 12 Conversation Features e End to End DTMF Signaling Tone Through e Pulse to Tone Conversion User Manual References e 4 3 64 Pulse to Tone Conversion 26 Features Guide General Features DIL 1 N Group Description Used to group extensions or Extension Groups or both so that an incoming CO call comes in on multiple extensions simultaneously DIL 1 N is one of the five different types of Incoming Group Up to 96 DIL Direct In Lines 1 N Groups can be set up in the system Ea
246. ons 170 Definition of busy extension status lt ICM type PT gt Off hook ICM button is not idle lt DN type PT gt When at least one DN is in use lt SLT gt Off hook an SLT is ringing an SLT has a call placed on hold Extension Number Assignment Extension numbers 3 or 4 digits are assigned to all extensions according to Numbering Plan by System Programming DSS Button DSS buttons permit One Touch access to an extension and provide Busy Lamp Field A DSS button can be assigned on a Proprietary Telephone PT or DSS Console by Station User or System Programming Call Directory Extension Dialing The extension user with one of the following PTs can make an extension call with Call Directory Extension Dialing on the display of the following PTs KX T7235 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 Call Progress Tone After dialing an extension number the extension user may hear one of the following call progress tones Ringback tone indicates that the other extension is being called Confirmation tone indicates that the user can perform Voice Calling Busy tone indicates that the other extension is busy Do Not Disturb tone indicates that the other extension has DND enabled Tenant Service If Tenant Service is employed calling to other extensions in other tenants is enabled disabled by System Programming Names can be given to all extensions by User or System Programming A
247. onsisting of more than one extension in the same tenant can be created in the system This feature applies to the following calls Call Forwarding All Calls to VM extensions Call Forwarding Busy to VM extensions Call Forwarding No Answer to VM extensions Call Forwarding Busy No Answer to VM extensions Hunting group overflow to VM extensions Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA to a VM extension Notification by Message Waiting Lamp Transfer by VM Transfer button UCD Overflow to VM extensions Features Guide General Features System Explanation 1 Call Forwarding All Calls Busy No Answer Busy No Answer to a VM extension If the extension user sets Call Forwarding to a VM extension the call directed to that extension is forwarded to a VM extension with Follow on ID of the extension user Outside Call DID DID ISDN DIL 1 1 DISA TIE Intercom System Call VPS Extension SEND VM 1 gt VM2 A Extension Group VM i i Y VMX VM 3 Outside Call DID DID ISDN DIL 1 1 DISA TIE System VPS Operator Extension See VM I J a gt VM2 Transfer I r i Extension Group i VM VMX 4 VM 3 Features Guide 55 General Features 2 Intercept Routing No
248. or Group 3rd call in th Cee gg Zu O These calls are waiting to be answered nee O until the Ist call is answered Ist call Operator Group Extension A Extension B Extension C 2 When Ringing Type is set to Single An incoming call intercom outside call arrives at an Operator extension Calls have arrived at an Operator Group 4th call in the queue This call is waiting to be answered until an Operator extension becomes idle 3rd call 2nd call Ist call DNS NZ ne sus EAA Y Extension A Extension B Extension C Features Guide 75 General Features 2 What if all Operator extensions are busy All Bus Outside calls Intercom calls Waiting Queue Waiting Queue Overflow Destination Overflow Destination is not programmed is programmed Overflow Timer Overflow Destination Intercept Destination Intercept Destination is not programmed is programmed Intercept Time Waiting Queue Intercept Destination 76 Features Guide General Features All Logout Au Logout Calls to Empty Group Calls to Empty Group are allowed are not allowed Outside calls Intercom calls Outside calls Intercom calls Waiting Queue Waiting Queue Disconnected Overflow Destination Overflow Destination Overflow Destination Overflow Des
249. orehand e After Hold Recall or Hold Alarm Tone is emitted the held call can be retrieved from any extension even if it is held in Exclusive Call Hold e Itis possible to disable the Hold Recall tone by System Programming lt Section 2 5 System Timer Hold Recall Time in the Programming Guide gt Automatic Disconnection If an inside outside call put on hold is not retrieved within 30 minutes it is disconnected automatically e The number of calls that can be put on exclusive hold at an extension The number of calls that can be held on an extension at a time differs depending on the telephone type as follows Intercom call lt ICM type PT gt One lt SLT gt One Not available lt DN type PT gt as many intercom calls as the number of DN PDN SDN buttons on it Outside call lt ICM type PT gt as many outside calls as the number of CO buttons on it lt DN type PT gt as many outside calls as the number of CO buttons and DN buttons on it lt SLT gt One Not available e An SLT user can hold only one call either an intercom or outside at a time To hold multiple calls use the Call Park feature Tenant Service If Tenant Service is utilized retrieving a held call intercom outside is only available within the same tenant Features Guide 245 General Features e Confirmation Tone A confirmation tone is sent to the extension user who retrieved the held call when it is retrieved by di
250. out the supplementary digits regardless of this setting Installation Manual References e 2 8 3 Personal Computer Printer Programming Guide References e 2 5 System Timer Call Duration Count Start Time e 10 4SMDR SMDR Connection Output Type Print out Error Information Format Page Length Format Skip Perforation Duration Log Outgoing Calls Duration Log Incoming Calls Print out Caller ID Information Print out DID Information Print out Incoming Call Start RC and Incoming Call Answer AN information Print out Timed Reminder Information Print out Account Code Print out LOGIN LOGOUT Time Display Mode Print out supplementary digits ISDN only e 10 6 System Parameters Serial Interface Port SMDR Parity Serial Interface Port SMDR NL Code Serial Interface Port SMDR Word Length Serial Interface Port SMDR Stop Bit Serial Interface Port SMDR Baud Rate e 10 7 System Time Features Guide References None 94 Features Guide General Features User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 95 General Features System Data Default Set Description This system permits re initialization of system programmed data Starting up the KX TD500 system with default values can be done using the Operation Switch MODE on the CPU card lt Section 2 10 2 CPU Rotary Switch Features in the Install
251. outing Table No Leading Digitsto Number to Trunk Group No Digit delete be added 01 02 03 04 05 01 1XX 0 10 Conditions Trunk to Trunk Restriction Used to allow or restrict trunk to trunk path connection To permit the TIE caller to make a CO call via the TD500 System the Trunk Group used for this purpose should be allowed to relay the call by System Programming 372 Features Guide TIE Line Features Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan 2 7 Trunk to Trunk Restriction e 4 2 Trunk Line DID TIE Digits to delete DID TIE Number to be added e 8 2 TIE Routing Table PBX Code e 9 2 DID Dial Registration Features Guide References 1 11 Transferring Features e Call Forwarding e Call Transfer Features Guide 373 TIE Line Features TIE Line and Outside CO Line Connection Description TIE Lines can be used to minimize the cost of calls to a distant location outside of the TIE Line Network A long distance call from one location may be a local call from another location This fact should be considered before making a long distance call If the destination of the long distance call is outside of the TIE Line Network extension users first make a call to a distant PBX via TIE Line and then can make a local CO call to the final destination through that PBX A Network of TIE Lines Outside Party
252. ow Receives the MDN number from ISDN Modifies the MDN number according to DID Digit Modification Determines the destination DN or FDN according to DID Dial Registration Digits Modification Procedures The System modifies the MDN number according to the following three parameters 1 Digit to receive DID The number of digits effective in the received MDN number 2 Digits to delete The number of digits to be deleted from the beginning of the digits processed in Step 1 Features Guide 365 ISDN Features 3 Number to be added The dials to be inserted at the beginning of the digits processed in Step 2 Example Digit to receive DID 4 digits Digits to delete 1 digit Number to be added 2 The System modifies the received MDN number 4311 into 2311 as follows Processed in Step 2 4311 311 The first digit 4 was deleted This results in 311 Processed in Step 3 311 2311 The digit 2 was added to the beginning of 311 This results in 2311 DID Dial Registration The System converts the modified number into the destination DN or FDN according to this table Example The System searches for the number 2311 in the table When matching is found the call rings the corresponding extension or floating station DID MDN No Destination Destination Name Max 16 digits Day Night Max 10 characters 2311 2000 3000 PANASONIC Conditions e This service is availa
253. owing records e Record all outgoing CO calls or outgoing toll calls e Record all incoming CO calls Examples of a printed call record lt Type A gt default Date Time T Ext CO Dial Number Ring Duration Acct code CC 02 02 00 03 01PM 1 E1001 T10101 1234567890123456789 00 00 14 1234567890 02 02 00 03 13PM 1 E1001 T10101 lt INCOMING gt RC 02 02 00 03 13PM 1 E1001 T10101 lt INCOMING gt 0 12 AN 02 02 00 03 13PM 1 E1001 T10101 lt INCOMING gt 0 12 00 00 1 02 02 00 03 13PM 1 E1001 Timed Reminder Start 02 02 00 03 13PM 1 E1001 Timed Reminder No Answer 02 02 00 03 13PM 1 E1001 Timed Reminder Answer 02 02 00 03 47PM 1 E1001 Login 02 02 00 03 47PM 1 E1001 Logout 02 02 00 03 47PM 1 E1001 1002 Login 02 02 00 03 47PM 1 E1001 Login 02 02 00 03 47PM 1 E1001 1002 Logout 02 02 00 03 47PM 1 E1001 Logout a 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 a1 12 The SMDR is printed with the above format when Type A is selected as Output Type by System Programming Upper limit of digits characters to be printed e Dial Number 7 Outgoing Call 19 digits e Dial Number 7 Caller ID Name 16 characters e Dial Number 7 Caller ID Dial 16 digits e Ring 7 9 59 e Acct code 10 10 digits Features Guide 91 General Features lt Type B gt Date Time T Ext co Dial Number Duration Acct code CC 15 02 00 06 42PM 1 E1009 T10801 123456789012345678901234 00 01 24 1234567890 16 02 00 01 29PM 1 E1001 T10101 lt INCOMING
254. p to three different SDN buttons can be assigned per PT Priority of CO Call Indication DN type PT Both CO and DN buttons can be assigned on one DN type PT at a time In this case an incoming CO call appears on a CO button if it has the associated CO line If not the incoming CO call appears on a PDN button Delayed Ringing Immediate delayed or no ringing can be assigned to the DN PDN SDN buttons PDN Delayed ringing assignment of the first PDN button assigned to the CO 01 button applies to all other PDN buttons on the PT SDN If more than one SDN button is assigned on the PT each SDN button can have its unique delayed ringing assignment respectively Ringing Transfer An extension user can transfer a call on an SDN button to its associated PDN button simply by pressing the SDN button PDN Call An SDN button can be used to call the extension which has the PDN button associated with the SDN button with a simple operation PDN If at least one PDN button is idle the calls appear on the PDN button either when the extension is on hook or off hook including when engaged in another call SDN DN type PT only An SDN button should be assigned to a DN type PT An SDN button assigned to an ICM type PT does not function Associated PDN button An SDN button should have its associated PDN button Otherwise it does not function SDN COS Class of Service This setting is applied when the extension user makes an outside call
255. path automatically A reorder tone is sent to the off hook party before it is disconnected No operation is necessary Conditions e If nothing is dialed within a certain period of time after the other party goes on hook a reorder tone is sent to the extension user and then is disconnected from the speech path Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References None User Manual References Not applicable 64 Features Guide General Features Manager Extension Description One extension in each tenant can be assigned as the Manager Extension This extension can perform the following Manager services lt System Tenant gt e BGM External turn on off e Local Alarm Indication e OGM outgoing message record play e Trunk Busy out set cancel e Trunk Route Control lt To other extensions gt e Caller ID Log Lock clear e Live Call Screening Password clear e Remote DND Control set cancel e Remote FWD Call Forwarding Cancel Once e Remote Station Lock Control set cancel e Switching COS e Timed Reminder Wake Up Call Remote set cancel confirm Conditions e Operator Extensions Operator extensions can also perform the above mentioned Manager Service functions except Local Alarm Indication e Tenant Service If Tenant Service is employed the Manager extension can be assigned to each tenant individually Programming Guide References e 2 2 Tenant Ma
256. play telephone KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 or KX T7235 the extension user can easily access several features The display telephones have the ability to perform the following features Feature KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 KX T7235 Call Directory Y v v v Extension Dialing vY Vv Vv Y Station Speed Dialing v Y Y v System Speed Dialing Y v Vv Y Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Vv v Call Log Outgoing Y v System Feature Access Menu v Y Vv v YW indicates the feature is available Conditions None Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References 1 11 Transferring Features e Call Forwarding 1 17 Display Features e Call Directory e Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb e Call Log Outgoing e System Feature Access Menu User Manual References e 4 5 Special Display Features Features Guide 345 General Features System Feature Access Menu Description This feature provides a display of the system features available at any time and allows the extension user to have access to the desired features e The features available are Absent Message Capability Electronic Station Lockout Automatic Callback Busy Camp On Executive Busy Override Deny Call Forwarding set cancel External Modem Control Call Forwarding All Calls to an Incoming Group Log In Log Out Group set cancel
257. rator seeking calls by a group of extensions called Operator Group which can consist of one or more extensions Operator Features The extension assigned as an Operator has the ability to perform the following operations lt System Tenant gt e BGM External turn on off e OGM outgoing message record play e Trunk Busy out set cancel e Trunk Route Control lt To other extensions gt e Caller ID Log Lock clear e Live Call Screening Password clear e Remote DND Control set cancel e Remote FWD Call Forwarding Cancel Once e Remote Station Lock Control set cancel e Switching COS e Timed Reminder Wake up Call Remote set cancel confirm Treatment of Operator Seeking Calls Within an Operator Group an operator seeking call extension outside may come in on a single operator Single or all operators in the group simultaneously Multi depending on System Programming lt Section 3 3 Extension Group 3 5 Incoming Group Operator Setting Ringing Type in the Programming guide gt Operator Group can be made up by assigning the group type of an Extension Group Incoming Group to Operator By default Extension Group 128 is assigned as Operator Group 74 Features Guide General Features 1 Outline sketch of Operator feature 1 When Ringing Type is set to Multi An incoming call intercom outside call arrives at all Operator extensions at the same time Calls have arrived at an Operat
258. rein are the property of their respective owners Features Guide 3 Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 General Features 3 2 u 0a 1 1 1 2 1 3 System EXpPanSlOn css cccscsicsssatsccsssnsencsvedsdececdecesvecesetvenesectssnevstenccsuatsesedsdeedesenesdoneeusecesese 10 EXtra Device Pot XDP 22 4 hiec is lek N E Ete hes Hae eee 10 System Administrati n sscseosessnsesonssssunsss ssssnntestnssshsnnesnhnssnnssshnnsss nnsens ssnnnesssnsenn eenne 11 System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer uu sersnersneesnessneenn 11 Traffic Measurement seesi 22 Re BR A E N A A a 14 User Programming with Proprietary Telephone eseeseeeseeseseeeresresresresrrsrrsserrssressrsresss 15 System Feal resiasssischesihissosentensssnnesnsssnsnssdsnseneekesunnnsunnneshhneense nnesnhstnsnshegenhessnsnsneneseen 16 Account Code Baty aiei rneer eree aep U e eeb eer a EEEE thet eairt ie R A eriei as 16 Automatic Calling Cancel irnir ween dead nied eet oe 18 Automatic Configuration eee eeeeseceseceeeceseceseeeseeeseesseceseceeeeeseesaecsaecaecaeceseseneeeneenaees 19 Background Music BGM EXxtermal ecccceeecceeseceeeeeeeeceeaeceteeeeeaeeeeaaeceaaeceeeeeaes 21 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection ursuersnersnesnnesnnennnennnennnennn ern nen 22 Classof Service COS rn ar as eee a a ae 24 Dial Type Selections aeiee teso eor aa E aan Re 26 DUS TN GroUpr anri nenna a a a a
259. res Ringing Delayed Description The extension can be set to ring immediately delayed ringing or no ringing Conditions DIL 1 N Call When a DIL 1 N call an outside call directed to multiple extensions comes in all destination extensions ring immediately by default This setting can be changed to delayed ringing or no ringing on each member of the DIL 1 N Group basis lt ICM type PT gt At an ICM type PT this feature does not apply to DISA or DIL 1 1 calls lt DN type PT gt Line Ringing Selection is assignable on a DN button PDN SDN basis However if Direct In Lines DIL 1 N is established Line Ringing Selection is determined by incoming DIL 1 N call group setting Delayed ringing assignment on PDN SDN button lt Section 2 2 9 PDN SDN Button Delayed Ringing Assignment in the User Manual gt does not function for a call which comes in on a Ring Group extension or a Phantom extension Answering a no ringing call If delayed ringing or no ringing is assigned to an extension the extension can answer an incoming call during no ring or the delay time by pressing the flashing button Programming Guide References 3 5 Incoming Group Group Type Destinations Ringing Type 4 3 Extension Line CO Key Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e DIL 1 N Group 1 5 Attended Features e Direct In Lines DIL User Manual References 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment 2 2 9 PDN SDN Button
260. res Guide 359 ISDN Features Calling Name Identification Presentation CNIP Description Calling Name Identification Presentation CNIP enables the calling party s name to be shown on the display of the called party s telephone when a call is received This is one of the ISDN supplementary services Conditions e The CNIP service for outgoing CO calls can be restricted by dialing the feature number for CNIR Calling Name Identification Restriction ISDN Public Switched Telephone Network This feature applies to the calls over the ISDN Public Switched Telephone Network e Hardware Requirements To utilize this feature a PRI23 card KX TD50290 is required e Itis programmable whether or not to use the CNIP ISDN service when an outside call is made using an ISDN PRI line by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option CNIP Service in the Programming Guide gt e The name for CNIP Service cannot be programmed It is informed from ISDN telephone company Installation Manual References e 2 5 7 PRI23 Card KX TD50290 Programming Guide References e 1 2 Slot Assignment e 1 9 PRI Port Assignment e 2 8 System Option CNIP Service Features Guide References 2 2 ISDN Originating Features e Calling Name Identification Restriction CNIR User Manual References Not applicable 360 Features Guide ISDN Features Calling Name Identification Restriction CNIR Description Allows the extension u
261. riction TRS Deny Code Depending on the application enter the TRS Deny codes in the associated tables Numeric characters and the wild card character X can be used Entry Example Level 2 TRS Deny Code Table Location Code 001 400 O11 Level 3 TRS Deny Code Table Location Code 001 976 002 1XXX976 400 Level 4 TRS Deny Code Table Location Code 001 400 Level 5 TRS Deny Code Table Location Code 001 411 002 1XXX555 400 186 Features Guide General Features Level 6 TRS Deny Code Table Location Code 001 002 003 400 X0 X1 c Toll Restriction TRS Exception Code Depending on the application enter the exception codes in the associated tables Numeric characters and the wild card character X can be used Entry Example Level 6 TRS Exception Code Table Location Code 001 911 002 1911 003 800 004 1800 200 Explanation If the extension user s Toll Restriction Level is 6 a The extension user cannot make a call whose toll call number is 201 because the number whose second digit 0 is one of the TRS Deny Codes for Level 6 b The extension user can make a call whose toll call number is 800 Though the number whose second digit 0 is one of the TRS Deny Codes for Level 6 the number 800 is one of the TRS Exception Codes for Level 6 The
262. rket and he may proceed to commit toll fraud b Please select the dealer whom you can trust for the installation and maintenance c Please change the password periodically d We strongly recommend that you set the system password to 7 digits for maximum protection against hackers Warning to the Dealer regarding the System Password a Please thoroughly inform the importance of the password and the dangers involved to the customer b Please maintain the secrecy of the password Because a person who knows the password can easily take over the control of any PBX system in the market and he may proceed to commit toll fraud c Please change the password periodically d We strongly recommend that you set the system password to 7 digits for maximum protection against hackers e You have to take the following measures to find the system password when you forget the password Therefore please never forget the password e Ifyou have the backup system data you can find the password by loading the backup system data to your PC and check the Password with programming screen e Ifyou don t have the backup system data you have to program again or contact your Panasonic dealers Conditions One Time One Access Only one device is allowed to perform System Programming at a time e System Password To access system administration a valid password must be entered The password is factory programmed and can be changed e System adm
263. rogramming Guide gt Unscreened to Extension Transfer Recall Destination If the call either extension or outside transferred to the destination party is not answered within a specified period of time lt Section 2 5 System Timer Transfer Recall Time in the Programming Guide gt it may ring an Operator Group extension instead of the extension who originally transferred it This is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 6 Transfer recall destination in the Programming Guide gt Automatic Disconnection If there is no answer for 30 minutes after Transfer Recall starts the line will be disconnected Camp on Transfer When the transfer destination party is busy the call is put in waiting status If the destination party remains busy or does not answer the call within a specified period of time lt Section 2 5 System Timer Transfer Recall Time in the Programming Guide gt the call will ring back the extension who transferred the call or an Operator extension Ringing Pattern A transferred call will ring following the regular ringing pattern depending on the type of call extension or outside being transferred Remote Administration Any extension user can transfer a call to the Remote resource Modem for Remote Administration A CO call can be transferred directly to a Uniform Call Distribution UCD group so that an idle extension is automatically hunted by UCD If all extensions in a UCD group
264. rolonging the duration of CO to CO line call is possible To prolong the call duration the caller should press any dialpad key except The amount of prolonging is set by DISA Prolong Time 0 to 7 minutes If this is set to zero then prolonging is disabled Depending on System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 13 DISA prolong operation in the Programming Guide gt the call duration can be prolonged 10 times or without limit To detect the end of a CO to CO line call CPC Signal Detection and Tone Detection can be assigned Tone Detection The following three ways of Tone Detection are provided lt Section 3 2 Trunk Group in the Programming Guide gt to disconnect a CO to CO line call 1 Cyclic Signal Detection Used to disconnect the trunk line when the system detects a cyclic signal during a CO to CO line call by DISA or AGC 2 Continuous Signal Detection Used to disconnect the trunk line when the system detects a continuous signal during a CO to CO line call by DISA or AGC Features Guide General Features 3 Silence Detection Used to disconnect the trunk line when the system detects no signal during a CO to CO line call by DISA or AGC DISA Call Re try by Pressing The key can be entered during a DISA call The action taken by the system depends upon System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 14 Dialing in DISA CO to CO talking in the Programming Guide gt If Disconnect and make
265. roup the call is handled in the location of DN assignment e If the FDN of an Extension Group is assigned as an Incoming Group destination calls directed to the Incoming Group are treated in the same manner as calls to their individual extension depending on the Group Type setting of the Incoming Group not that of the Extension Group However there are the following exceptions a When VM or AA is specified in the Group Type setting of an Extension Group and any group type except DIL 1 N is specified in the Group Type setting of an Incoming Group calls directed to the Incoming Group do not come in on his extension 42 Features Guide General Features b When VM or AA is specified in the Group Type setting of an Extension Group and DIL 1 N is specified in the Group Type setting of an Incoming Group all the extensions belonging to the Extension Group work as a VM or AA group Calls to a UCD group or an Operator group Single hunt for an idle extension in the order assigned in the Incoming Group It is programmable whether to start at the extension following the last one called or to always start at the first assigned extension by System Programming lt Section 3 5 Incoming Group Search Mode in the Programming Guide gt This feature overrides the Restriction by the Tenant Service UCD Login Monitor Login Logout status of the UCD Group members can be monitored by the extension specified as the Supervisor
266. rtain time split the day into three zones as follows Sat Sun Mon Fri 1 7 00 a m 2 00 p m 1 7 00 a m 1 00 p m 2 2 00 p m 5 00 p m 2 1 00 p m 6 00 p m 3 5 00 p m 7 00 a m 3 6 00 p m 7 00 a m To program the time zones listed above use the program ARS Time Table In this table up to four time zones Time A Time B Time C Time D can be programmed Enter the starting hour for each zone Table C Example ARS Time Table Sat Sun Mon Fri Time Entry Time Entry Zones Zones Time A 7 00 a m Time A 7 00 a m EEE T A lt Enter the starting time Time B 2 00 p m Time B 1 00 p m al each zone ee zone Time C 5 00 p m Time C 6 00 p m is not necessary Time D Disable Time D Disable select Disable Step 4 Determine the priority of the Trunk Groups in each time zone The table on the next page shows the carriers and Trunk Groups selected for each priority and time zone Features Guide 157 General Features Trunk Group Priority 3 Table D Time A Time B Time C Least Costly Carrier Carrier F Group 2 Carrier F Group 2 Carrier E Group 1 Trunk Group Priority 1 Next Less Costly Carrier i a Carrier E Group 1 Carrier G Group 3 Carrier F Group 2 Trunk Group Priority 2 Most Costly Carrier A j Carrier G Group 3 Carrier E Group 1 Carrier G Group 3
267. runk Group basis Before utilizing this feature IRNA for TIE Line should be enabled by System Programming Features Guide 261 General Features Programming Guide References e 2 5 System Timer Intercept Time DISA IRNA Time e 3 2 Trunk Group Intercept Destination Day Night IRNA for TIE Line e 4 3 Extension Line Intercept Destination Day Night Features Guide References None User Manual References Not applicable 262 Features Guide General Features One Touch Transfer Description Allows the PT user to transfer the call to the destination extension simply by pressing the DSS or Phantom button This eliminates the needs for pressing the TRANSFER button and dialing the destination extension number If this feature is enabled the current call is placed on hold Consultation Hold automatically when the PT user presses an idle DSS or Phantom button for transferring purpose This feature is convenient for extension users such as Operators who handle a large volume of calls This feature can be categorized as follows One Touch Transfer by DSS or Phantom Allows the PT user to transfer the call extension or outside simply by pressing the DSS or Phantom button associated with the destination extension One Touch Transfer by DSS Allows the PT user to transfer the CO call simply by pressing the DSS button associated with the destination extension Conditio
268. s Incoming Group Data Range Ringing Type for DIL 1 N Immediate 1 ring Delay 3 ring Delay 6 ring Delay No Ring Overflow Setting Timer for Terminate Operator UCD None 5 180s Trunk Data Range CPC Signal Detection Time Outgoing Incoming None 6 5 2 75 x 8 ms Wink Signal Time out None 1 127 x 64 ms Answer Wait Timer None 1 2 3 4 min Extension Data Range Call Forwarding No Answer Time 0 12 rings Ringing Type Flexible CO Key PDN SDN Immediate 1 ring Delay 3 ring Delay 6 ring Delay No Ring Conditions 102 None Features Guide General Features Programming Guide References e 2 5 System Timer e 3 2 Trunk Group e 3 3 Extension Group e 3 5 Incoming Group e 4 2 Trunk Line e 4 3 Extension Line Features Guide References None User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 103 General Features Trunk Busy Out Description Allows the Manager and an Operator to busy out a CO line to prevent extension users from accessing it The details of Trunk Busy out feature There are the following two types of trunk port relay status which is set to Trunk Busy out a Busy Loop Relay On making the line busy by hardware b Idle Loop Relay Off making the line busy by software The Central Office recognizes a trunk line as shown in the table The Specification of
269. s activated when both calling and called extensions are using one of the KX T7400 series PTs e BSS OHCA and whisper OHCA do not function if the other extension is a DN type PT Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Call Waiting Set Cancel Features Guide 163 General Features Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA e Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper 1 9 Answering Features e Call Waiting User Manual References e 4 3 8 Busy Station Signaling BSS e 4 3 12 Call Park 4 3 49 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA e 4 3 50 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper 164 Features Guide General Features Do Not Disturb DND Override Description Allows the extension user to ring the other extension in DND mode by dialing 1 while hearing the DND tone Conditions e Class of Service COS programming COS programming lt Section 2 4 Class of Service COS DND Override in the Programming Guide gt determines the extension users who can perform DND Override e Ifthe extension user hears a reorder tone after dialing 1 the extension is not permitted to execute Do Not Disturb DND Override feature by System Programming e What if a busy tone is heard after executing DND override If the extension user hears a busy tone after performing this feature the other extension in DND mode is busy In this case the extension can p
270. s needs DSS buttons can be changed to the other function buttons PF Programmable Feature buttons printed as F1 through F16 These buttons are provided without default setting The paired PT user can program the buttons for the other function buttons Conditions e Programming the DSS and PF buttons can be done only from the paired PT by Station Programming or System Programming with Personal Computer e Ifthe extension number assigned to a DSS button is changed to another number the DSS button automatically follows the new number Re programming is not necessary Installation Manual References 2 4 Extension Cards Programming Guide References e 1 4 Extension Port Assignment Attribute DN e 3 3 Extension Group UCD Setting LOGIN Monitor e 3 5 Incoming Group UCD Setting Supervisor Extension e 4 4 DSS Console Paired Extension DSS Key PF Key Features Guide 299 General Features Features Guide References 1 1 System Expansion e EXtra Device Port XDP 1 11 Transferring Features e One Touch Transfer 1 16 Button Features e Button Direct Station Selection DSS e Button Flexible User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 5 DSS Console Features 300 Features Guide General Features Handset Microphone Mute Description While on a handset call the PT user KX T7400 series PT only can turn off
271. s of Service COS Transfer to CO in the Programming Guide gt Limited call duration The duration of an unattended conference is restricted by a system timer Hold Recall tone Hold Recall tone is sent to the extension user who left the conference 50 seconds before the time out Hold Alarm tone An alarm tone is sent to both outside parties three times at 5 second interval 15 seconds before the time out The call is disconnected at the time out unless the extension who originated the Unattended Conference returns to the call e CONF Conference button If a CONF button is not provided on a PT it can be assigned to a flexible CO DSS PF button by Station User or System Programming Programming Guide References 2 4 Class of Service COS Trunk Group Setting Transfer to CO e 2 5 System Timer CO to CO Line Call Duration Time e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key PF Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key PF Key Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Limited Call Duration 1 12 Conversation Features e Conference 3 Party 270 Features Guide General Features 1 13 Audible Tone Features Hold Recall User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 21 Conference 3 Party 4 3 23 Conference Unattended Features Guide 271 General Features Data Line Security Description Once Data Line Security is set on
272. s referenced by the system to identify the trunk route when an extension user made a TIE call by dialing the feature number for TIE Line Access or Other PBX 01 16 A routing pattern appropriate for each call is decided by the first 3 digits except TIE Line Access code of the dialed number e Routing Table Override If a TIE call is made by pressing a CO button this table is not referenced by the system and the call is routed over the specified TIE line directly Programming Example A Network of TIE Lines PBX 1 PBX Code 951 Ext 1000 Ext 1000 TIE Routing Table No Leading Digits to Number to Trunk Group No Digit delete be added 01 02 03 04 05 01 951 0 10 02 When TIE Line Access Code 951 1000 is dialed by an extension user the routing pattern for this call is decided by 951 Then the call is routed over TG10 Features Guide 383 TIE Line Features 384 Routing Procedure 2 Routing Flow Chart 1 When a call is made by an extension user in your PBX Analyzing extension dialed number Extension Y TIE trunk No Y Own Ext No Yes Y Calling to Extension Y Is the leading 3 gt digits registered in the table No Yes Y Y Calling to TIE Reorder Tone Y Calling to CO Features Guide T
273. s you to have all calls to an Incoming Group forwarded to the pre assigned Incoming Group or Extension Group Conditions e Types of calls which are forwarded by this feature are Call Type Outside calls Direct Inward Dialing DID ISDN Direct In Lines DIL Direct Inward Dialing DID Direct Inward System Access DISA Intercept Routing Multiple Directory Number MDN TIE Transfer Intercom calls Extension Transfer e Class of Service COS programming COS programming lt Section 2 4 Class of Service COS Incoming Group FWD in the Programming Guide gt determines the extension that can perform this feature The Call Forwarding setting extension varies depending on the following three modes Disable Disables this feature Own Group s Enables forwarding all calls to other Incoming Groups or Extension Groups Only its own group s can be set as the Call Forwarding setting extension Any Group Enables forwarding all calls to other Incoming Groups or Extension Groups Any group can be set as the Call Forwarding setting extension e Forwarded call is not forwarded furthermore There can be only one stage of Call Forwarding If a call is forwarded to an extension in Call Forwarding mode the call is not forwarded furthermore e Group FWD button Group FWD button can be assigned to a flexible CO DSS button by Station User or System Programming e Distinctive Dial Tone When this feat
274. ser to restrict the presentation of the calling party s name to the called party when making a call This is one of the ISDN supplementary services Conditions e Ifthe presentation is enabled the called party can check the calling party s name before the called party answers it Calling Name Identification Presentation CNIP e ISDN Public Switched Telephone Network This feature applies to the calls over the ISDN Public Switched Telephone Network Hardware Requirements To utilize this feature a PRI23 card KX TD50290 is required Installation Manual References e 2 5 7 PRI23 Card KX TD50290 Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan CLIR CNIR Features Guide References 2 2 ISDN Originating Features e Calling Name Identification Presentation CNIP User Manual References e 4 3 20 Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR Calling Name Identification Restriction CNIR Features Guide 361 ISDN Features 2 3 ISDN Attended Features Direct Inward Dialing DID Description Provides automatic direction of an incoming call from ISDN to a specific extension To realize this service the DID number informed from ISDN telephone company is required The DID number is converted to a DN or FDN of the destination using a pre programmed conversion table This is an ISDN version of DID Direct Inward Dialing service Assignable destinations are 1 Regular extension with DN 2 Virtual extension with FDN
275. signed extension Station Hunting Group can be made up by assigning the group type of an Incoming Group as Terminate Up to 96 Station Hunting Groups can be created in the system Conditions 220 What if all extensions in the group are busy If all of the searched extensions are busy the system redirects the call to the overflow destination assigned by System Programming lt Section 3 3 Extension Group 3 5 Incoming Group Overflow Setting Destination Day Night in the Programming Guide gt FWD DND Mode If the called extension is in Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb mode Station Hunting skips the extension by default This can be changed by System Programming lt Section 3 3 Extension Group 3 5 Incoming Group FWD DND Mode in the Programming Guide gt To leave the hunting group temporarily use the Log Out function To re join use the Log In function Features Guide General Features e Message Waiting notification A message waiting notification to an extension in the station hunting group is treated in the same manner as the ordinary call Programming Guide References e 1 4 Extension Port Assignment Group No e 2 3 Numbering Plan Login Logout Group Login Logout e 3 3 Extension Group FDN Tenant No Overflow Setting Destination Day Night Group Type FWD DND Mode Extension Call Hunting e 3 5 Incoming Group FDN Overflow Settin
276. sing TRANSFER or CONF button With a Single Line Telephone it is established by pressing the switchhook lightly it allows the extension user to place a call on hold temporarily to transfer it make a Conference call or perform Call Splitting Screened Unscreened To CO TIE Line e Class of Service COS programming COS programming lt Section 2 4 Class of Service COS Transfer to CO Transfer to TIE in the Programming Guide gt determines the extensions that can perform this feature e CO to CO call If a CO call is transferred to an outside party CO to CO call is established and the call duration is restricted depending on the setting of the system timer lt Section 2 5 System Timer CO to CO Line Call Duration Time in the Programming Guide gt 258 Features Guide General Features Hold Recall tone Hold Recall tone is generated to the extension who transferred the call 50 seconds before the time out Hold Alarm tone Hold Alarm tone is generated to both outside parties 15 seconds before the time out The call is disconnected at the time out unless the extension user who transferred the call joins the CO to CO call to establish a conference call CO to TIE call If a CO call is transferred to the destination party via TIE line a CO to TIE call is established and the call duration is restricted depending on the setting of the system timer lt Section2 5 System Timer CO to CO Line Call Duration Time in the P
277. sion Group e Integration DPT e Integration Inband e Integration Voice Mail VM Service e Integration VPS User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 47 General Features Integration DPT Description This is one of the VPS Integration features With DPT Integration the KX TD500 System sends the VPS the information and commands on the calling extension via DPT interfaced data link to help it work more effectively This is available only with Panasonic KX TVS series VPS Using the information and commands the VPS can a identify the extension number of the caller b identify the trunk group number of the caller c know where the call is forwarded from and its line status d recognize what the caller wants to do In addition to VM Service Integration and AA Service Integration following special features are available only with DPT Integration Auto Configuration Live Call Screening LCS Two Way Recording into the Voice Mail Two Way Transfer Conditions e A maximum of eight Panasonic Voice Processing Systems can be connected to the KX TD500 system e To utilize this feature DOHCA card and DLC card KX TD50172 DHLC card KX TD50170 are required e The first DLC DHLC card will support jacks 1 to 8 of the first TVS300 system A second card will support jacks 9 to 12 of the TVS300 system A third and fourth card are needed to support a second TVS300 system which is fully configured
278. stalled behind an existing host PBX This is performed by connecting extension lines from the host PBX to CO line ports of the KX TD500 System Conditions e To enable Host PBX Access put the host PBX line in a Trunk Group The extension user can access the host PBX by selecting that CO line Host PBX Access Code A Host PBX Access Code is required to access CO lines of the host PBX for making an outside call Automatic Pause Insertion A pause if programmed can be inserted between the user dialed Host PBX Access Code and the following digits Program the pause time required by the Host PBX for that Trunk Group External Feature Access Access to the host PBX during a conversation is also possible Programming Guide References e 3 2 Trunk Group Pause Time PBX Access Code Features Guide References 1 7 Dialing Features e Pause Insertion Automatic 1 12 Conversation Features e External Feature Access User Manual References e 4 3 35 External Feature Access Features Guide 4 General Features Incoming Group Description To support efficient utilization of extensions they can be grouped together as an Incoming Group Incoming Group is used to direct incoming calls both extension and outside to a group of answering extensions associated with the type of incoming calls Up to 96 Incoming Groups can be created in the system The following five different types of Incoming Group can be created
279. t Timed Reminder Ringing Time The alarm tone continues to ring the destination extension for 30 seconds by default This period of time ranging from 30 to 240 seconds can be changed by System Programming lt Section 2 5 System Timer Timed Reminder Ringing Time in the Programming Guide gt Timed Reminder Arrive Count Timed Reminder ringing is repeated up to 3 times until the destination extension replies it by default This number of times ranging from 1 to 5 times can be changed by System Programming lt Section 2 5 System Timer Timed reminder Arrive Count in the Programming Guide gt Timed Reminder Arrive Wait Time The interval time between each Timed Reminder ringing is 60 seconds by default This interval time ranging from 20 to 240 seconds can be changed by System Programming lt Section 2 5 System Timer Timed Reminder Arrive Wait Time in the Programming Guide gt Alert Extension An Alert extension can be assigned for Day Night mode per tenant respectively by System Programming lt Section 2 2 Tenant Alert Extension in the Programming Guide gt Features Guide 225 General Features e Alert button assignment The Alert button can be assigned to a flexible CO button on the Alert extension e Alert Ringing If Timed Reminder Wake Up Call is not responded by the guest a Timed Reminder alert can be sent to the alert extension when the Alert button indicator on it is turned on in red by System Programmi
280. t Disturb DND e Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call Features Guide 87 General Features 1 9 Answering Features e Live Call Screening LCS 1 11 Transferring Features e Call Forwarding User Manual References e 4 4 3 Call Log Incoming Log Lock e 4 4 4 Live Call Screening LCS Password Clear 4 4 7 Remote DND Do Not Disturb Control e 4 4 8 Remote FWD Call Forwarding Cancel Once 4 4 9 Remote Station Lock Control e 4 4 10 Switching COS e 4 4 11 Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call 88 Features Guide General Features Remote Station Lock Control Description Allows the Manager and the Operators to lock other extensions remotely that is from their own extensions Locked extensions cannot be used for making outside calls or intercom calls or both except calls to the Operators and the emergency calls depending on the setting Conditions Electronic Station Lockout Override Remote Station Lock Control overrides Electronic Station Lockout If Electronic Station Lockout has already been set by the extension user and Remote Station Lock is set by the Manager or an Operator canceling the lock is only possible by the Manager or an Operator Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Manager Extension e Operator Group 1 6 Originating Features e Electronic Station Lockout User Manual References e 4 3 3
281. t delete be added 01 02 03 04 05 01 950 0 10 02 2 When a caller makes a CO call according to DID Dial Registration A Network of TIE Lines DID ISDN i Local DID Line Branch co 1234567 l Extension numbers i Extension numbers 2000 2299 l h 1000 1199 l l I Employee 1 i Ext 2000 Inside of the TIE Line Network Call Flow 1 Employee 1 at a local branch makes a CO call to PBX 1 via DID ISDN or DID line 2 PBX 1 converts the DID ISDN DID number 1234567 into the destination DN or FDN 2000 according to DID Dial Registration table 3 Employee 1 at a local branch will be connected to Ext 2000 of PBX 2 Features Guide 371 TIE Line Features Programming example To make up the TIE Line Network above the following System Programming is required at PBX 1 and 2 respectively PBX 1 e 2 3 Numbering Plan 01 1st Hundred Block Extension 10 77 Other PBX 01 2 e 8 2 TIE Routing Table No Leading Digitsto Number to Trunk Group No Digit delete be added 01 02 03 04 05 01 2XX 0 10 e 9 2 DID Dial Registration DID MDN No Destination Destination Name Max 16 digits Day Night Max 10 characters 1234567 2000 2000 PBX 2 e 2 3 Numbering Plan 01 1st Hundred Block Extension 20 77 Other PBX 01 1 e 8 2 TIE R
282. t the extension following the last one called or to always start at the first assigned extension by System Programming lt Section 3 5 Incoming Group Search Mode in the Programming Guide gt Features Guide General Features Programming Guide References 1 4 Extension Port Assignment Group No 2 2 Tenant Operator FDN 2 3 Numbering Plan Operator Call 3 3 Extension Group FDN Tenant No Overflow Setting Destination Day Night Overflow Setting Timer Group Type Operator Setting Ringing Type Operator Setting Call Priority 3 5 Incoming Group FDN Overflow Setting Destination Day Night Overflow Setting Timer Group Type Search Mode Operator Setting Ringing Type Operator Setting Call Priority 4 2 Trunk Line Destination Day Night Lunch Break Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Operator Group e Manager Extension User Manual References 4 3 53 Operator Call Features Guide 179 General Features PDN Call Description If the Extension 1001 has an SDN button which corresponds with the PDN button of the Extension 2001 PDN owner the Extension 1001 can call the Extension 2001 simply by pressing the associated SDN button twice The Extension 1001 can also transfer a call on the CO PDN to the Extension 2001 with a simple operation Conditions e SDN button An SDN button can be assigned to a fl
283. tension Group 29 External Feature Access 275 External Modem Control 32 EXtra Device Port XDP 10 F Fault Recovery Diagnostics 112 Flash 277 Flexible Numbering 34 Floating Station 39 Full One Touch Dialing 203 G General Features 9 H Handset Microphone Mute 301 Handset Headset Selection 302 Hands free Answerback 238 Hands free Operation 278 Hold Recall 288 Holding Features 243 Host PBX Access 41 Features Guide Index I Incoming Group 42 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN 350 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Exten sion 354 Integration Automated Attendant AA Service 45 Integration DPT 48 Integration Inband 51 Integration Voice Mail VM Service 54 Integration VPS 60 Inter Office Calling 170 Intercept Routing 261 ISDN Attended Features 362 ISDN Features 349 350 ISDN Originating Features 356 L LED Indication 323 Limited Call Duration 62 Line Preference Incoming No Line Prime Line Ringing Line 239 Line Preference Outgoing Idle Line No Line Prime Line 172 Live Call Screening LCS 241 Local Alarm 112 Lockout 64 Log In Log Out 218 M Manager Extension 65 Message Waiting 343 Microphone Mute 303 Mixed Station Capabilities 66 Multiple Directory Number MDN Ringing Ser vice 365 Music on Hold 68 N Night Service 70 O Off Premise Extension OPX 73 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA 174 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Wh
284. tension port to the modem Assign the FDN of the modem by System Programming Dial this number from the PC Remote Programming You can perform System Programming and maintenance from a remote site usinga PC Install the Remote Card and assign the Remote FDN by System Programming Starting system administration from a remote location can be done using one of the following ways a Call Transfer e Call an extension probably the Operator from a remote location and request a transfer to the modem b DISA e Dial the FDN of the modem using the DISA feature c DIL 1 1 e Assign the FDN of the modem as the destination of the DIL 1 1 feature d DID DID ISDN e Program DID DID ISDN feature so that the incoming telephone number is converted to the FDN of the modem e TIE Lines e Dial the FDN of the modem e Dial the TIE Line access code the PBX Code and the FDN of the modem Features Guide 11 General Features Method 3 Using an external modem Please refer to External Modem Control of Section 1 3 System Features and Section 4 3 36 External Modem Control in the User Manual For more information and programming instructions please refer to the Installation Manual and the Programming Guide Warning to the Customer regarding the System Password a Please maintain the secrecy of the password Because a person who knows the password can easily take over the control of any PBX system in the ma
285. terns Slow flash Moderate flash Rapid flash The following tables show the lighting pattern for each Line Access Button LED Indication and the line status INTERCOM button LED Indication Line Status Off Idle Green On Intercom call Conference established Green slow flash Intercom call hold Green moderate flash On exclusive hold Consultation hold Green rapid flash An intercom call or a doorphone call is coming in Features Guide 323 General Features 324 LED Indication and the line status S CO button LED Indication Line Status Off Idle Green On You are using the line Green slow flash You have a held call Green moderate flash You have one of the following 1 Exclusive hold 2 Consultation hold 3 Conference unattended Green rapid flash Hold Recall Privacy Release possible A CO call is coming in on a single extension Red On Other in use Other on exclusive hold Red slow flash Other on hold Red moderate flash Red rapid flash A CO call is coming in on multiple extensions simultaneously LED Indication and the line status G CO button LED Indication Line Status Off Idle Green On You are using the line Green slow flash You have a held call Green
286. th the lowest extension port physical number Installing additional cards may change the order e Call Transfer If the call transferred to another extension is not answered and then the outside caller disconnects the line Caller ID information is recorded in the Call Log of the extension to which the call was transferred e Call Forwarding All Busy No Answer If the call forwarded to another extension is not answered and then the outside caller disconnects the line Caller ID information is recorded in the Call Log of the extension to which the call was forwarded Regarding Call Forwarding No Answer Caller ID information may be recorded in the Call Log of both call forwarding setting and destination extensions if the call was not answered by both extensions Features Guide General Features e Call Log Incoming Overwrite Mode If the Call Log is full 30 call records are already logged when a new Caller ID call comes in the extension user can choose one of the following two options a anew call record overwrites the oldest one in the Call Log b a new call record is not logged e Call Log Incoming Log Lock The extension user can lock the call log display so that incoming call information is not shown on the display The Manager or an Operator can cancel the Call Log Incoming Log Lock in case the extension user forgets the lock code e Callback Process The system automatically modifies the incoming
287. the same SO bus BRI card Installation Manual References e 2 5 6 BRI Card KX TD50288 e 2 5 7 PRI23 Card KX TD50290 Programming Guide References e 1 2 Slot Assignment e 1 8 BRI Port Assignment Type DN Group No e 1 9 PRI Port Assignment Type DN Group No e 4 7 ISDN Extension Line CLIP Number Public CLIP Number Private COS No Primary COS No Secondary Features Guide References None User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 355 ISDN Features 2 2 ISDN Originating Features Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP Description Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP enables the calling party s number to be shown on the display of the called party s telephone when a call is received This is one of the ISDN supplementary services To use the CLIP service number assignments are required as follows e CLIP number for each outside line e CLIP number for each extension Conditions e CLIP Numbers for ISDN PRI Lines When an extension user makes an outside call using an ISDN PRI line one of the following numbers depending on the extension user s choice is displayed on the telephone of the other party as the CLIP number a CLIP number assigned to the trunk line The number stored in Subscriber lt Section 4 2 Trunk Line in the Programming Guide gt b CLIP number assigned to the extension line The number stored in CLIP Num
288. the extension communication between the extension and the other end is protected from any signal such as Call Waiting Hold Recall and Executive Busy Override Data equipment or a facsimile may be connected to an extension port so that the extension user can perform data communications During communication Data Line Security maintains secure data transmission against tones or interruptions from other extensions Conditions e Automatic Privacy Assigning Data Line Security always offers conversation privacy unless Privacy Release is executed e If one extension in a conversation has set Data Line Security it applies to the both extensions e Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone dial tone 2 after going off hook depending on System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 15 Special dial tone after setting feature in the Programming Guide gt Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Data Line Security Set Cancel e 2 8 System Option Special dial tone after setting feature e 4 3 Extension Line Data Line Mode Features Guide References 1 9 Answering Features e Call Waiting User Manual References e 4 3 17 Call Waiting e 4 3 25 Data Line Security e 4 3 33 Executive Busy Override e 4 3 63 Privacy Release 272 Features Guide General Features Doorphone Call Description Doorphone provides a conversati
289. the handset microphone by pressing the AUTO ANSWER MUTE button for privacy reasons Ifthe Handset Microphone Mute mode is activated by the caller handset microphone is off the other party cannot hear the caller s voice but the caller can hear the other party s voice Conditions e This feature is available for KX T7400 series PT only e If AUTO ANSWER MUTE or VOICE CALL MUTE KX T7450 only button is pressed during an OHCA call Handset Microphone Mute mode will be turned on e If AUTO ANSWER MUTE button is pressed in Hands free mode Microphone Mute mode will be turned on Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References 1 15 Proprietary Telephone Features e Microphone Mute User Manual References e 4 3 39 Handset Microphone Mute e 4 3 47 Microphone Mute Features Guide 301 General Features Handset Headset Selection Description The system supports the use of optional headset on PTs Conditions e Headset mode can be set by DPT Station Programming APT HANDSET HEADSET selector on the APT or on the handset or both e OHCA is available on an extension in Headset mode e Please refer to the Operating Instructions of the Headset KX T7090 for operation Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References None User Manual References 2 2 5 Handset Headset Selection 302 Features Guide General Feat
290. the phone number modified by the ARS procedure will be printed out by SMDR e The KX TD500 System can store up to 1000 call information data If more than 1000 calls are originated or received the oldest data is overwritten by the newest one e Itis possible to select whether SMDR prints out the Caller ID and DID information by System Programming e Itis possible to select whether or not the SMDR prints out received incoming calls RC and answered incoming calls AN information by System Programming e SMDR data is not deleted when you reset the system e If FLASH is manually sent out during a call the call record is printed and a new record is started e If the calendar IC is out of order will be printed out on date and time fields Features Guide 93 General Features e SMDR Station Message Detail Recording records the detailed Timed Reminder information and prints it out automatically when the Timed Reminder starts and it is answered or not answered This can be enabled or disabled by System Programming e Itis possible to select whether or not SMDR prints out the Login Logout status of Extension Group Incoming Group members and Phantom extensions by System Programming e Itis possible to select whether or not SMDR prints out the supplementary digits when the call is made using an ISDN line by System Programming However ifthe call is made using a memory dialing Redial One Touch Dialing etc SMDR prints
291. there are no calls in the waiting queue in all of the groups All Logout All extensions in the Extension Group or Incoming Group can be logged out This is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option Empty Group in the Programming Guide gt If this feature is disabled by System Programming the extension user cannot leave the group Log Out At least one extension must be logged in However this does not apply to Auto Logout of the UCD group extensions Call Log Incoming If a CO call to a UCD Group is not answered the caller s information is recorded in the Call Log of the last extension at which the call rang 2 Types of calls which come in on a UCD Group FDN Floating Directory Number for UCD Group can be assigned or dialed as a destination of the following calls Outside calls DID DID ISDN DIL DISA IRNA Transfer TIE Intercom calls Intercom Transfer 142 Features Guide General Features Outside Calls co TIE DIL1 N DIL Group DISA Ring DID Group DID ISDN Phantom Extensions KX TD500 System i i i i Intercom Calls Ext Ext Ext Ext Ext Transfer IRNA Transfer Transfer UCD Group Features Guide 143 General Features 3 What if all extensions in aUCD Group are busy or logged out All Busy pe Outside calls Intercom calls including transferred
292. tination is not programmed is programmed is not programmed is programmed Overflow Timer Immediately Overflow Destination Overflow Destination __ aaas Intercept Destination Intercept Destination AIR Intercept Destination is programmed is not programmed is programmed Intercept Time Immediately Intercept Destination Waiting Queue Intercept Destination Note e An incoming call which is arriving at a CO key of an Operator PT extension is regarded as an arrived call Features Guide 77 General Features Conditions e Tenant Service If Tenant Service is employed each tenant can have its own unique Operator Group in the Extension Group independently Programming Guide References e 1 4 Extension Port Assignment Group No e 2 3 Numbering Plan Login Logout Group Login Logout e 3 3 Extension Group FDN Tenant No Overflow Setting Destination Day Night Overflow Setting Timer Group Type Calls to Empty Group Operator Setting Ringing Type Operator Setting Call Priority e 3 5 Incoming Group FDN Overflow Setting Destination Day Night Overflow Setting Timer Group Type Operator Setting Ringing Type Operator Setting Call Priority Calls to Empty Group e 4 2 Trunk Line Destination Day Night Lunch Break e 4 3 Extension Line Group No F
293. tion Day Night 9 2 DID Dial Registration Destination Day Night e There are 2 types of switching modes Auto and Manual The mode is set by the PC programming or by entering the feature number Night Mode Set Cancel or pressing the Day Night button by allowed extension on a tenant basis When the system is in Auto mode the mode will be switched automatically in accordance with timetable in 2 1 Tenant screen of the PC programming When the system is in Manual mode the system keeps the current mode even though the time to change the mode automatically has arrived e If DIL destination is not assigned for Lunch Break mode DIL destination performs in Day mode as usual Features Guide 71 General Features Programming Guide References e 2 2 Tenant Alert Extension Day Night DAY NIGHT Switching Mode Day SUN SAT Night SUN SAT Lunch Start SUN SAT Lunch End SUN SAT Break Start SUN SAT Break End SUN SAT e 2 3 Numbering Plan Night Mode Set Cancel 2 4 Class of Service COS TRS Level Day Night Trunk Group No 01 48 Day Night Switching Day Night Mode e 3 2 Trunk Group Intercept Destination Day Night e 3 3 Extension Group Overflow Setting Destination Day Night e 3 5 Incoming Group Overflow Setting Destination Day Night e 4 2 Trunk Line Destination Day Night Lunch Break e 4 3 Extension
294. tion Allows the extension user to interrupt an existing extension outside call This establishes a 3 party conference call This feature can be categorized as follows Executive Busy Override Barge In Allows the PT user to interrupt an existing outside call either between two outside parties or between an outside party and an inside party by pressing the red lit S CO or DN button Executive Busy Override Extension Allows the extension PT SLT users to interrupt an existing extension call either between two inside parties or between an inside party and an outside party by dialing 2 after hearing a busy tone Conditions General e Class of Service COS programming COS programming lt Section 2 4 Class of Service COS Busy Override in the Programming Guide gt determines the extension users who can perform this feature Executive Busy Override Deny It is possible for extension users to prevent this feature from being executed by another extension user e This feature does not work if Executive Busy Override Deny or Data Line Security is set at either one of two extensions or both of them Confirmation tone When a 2 party call is changed to a 3 party call and vice versa a confirmation tone is sent to all three parties This tone can be eliminated by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 8 Confirmation tone for Override Barge in Conference and Privacy Release in the Programmi
295. tion 2 5 System Timer Section 4 3 Extension Line Call Forwarding No Answer Time in the Programming Guide gt If 0 is specified in Section 4 3 Extension Line Call Forwarding No Answer Time setting in Section 2 5 System Timer works Class of Service COS programming COS programming lt Section 2 4 Class of Service COS Call FWD to CO TIE in the Programming Guide gt determines the extension that can perform this feature Features Guide 253 General Features Treatment of the forwarded call Toll Restriction Automatic Route Selection ARS and Account Code Entry requirements of the extension in Call Forwarding mode still apply to the call forwarded by this feature e Ifyou are storing an account code enter the account code and then the delimiter 99 before the line access code Extension to CO Line Call If acall between an extension and an outside party is established by this feature the call duration can be restricted depending on the setting of the system timer lt Section 2 5 System Timer Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time in the Programming Guide gt e Co to CO Line Call If a call between two outside parties is established by this feature the call duration is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 5 System Timer CO to CO Line Call Duration Time in the Programming Guide gt An alarm tone is sent to both outside parties 15 seconds before the time out The call is disconnected at the time
296. to the following trunks T1 DID TIE DID ISDN PRI23 BRI Programming Guide References e 4 2 Trunk Line Answer Wait Timer Features Guide References None User Manual References Not applicable 18 Features Guide General Features Automatic Configuration Description This is one of the DPT Integration features If DPT Integration is activated the system transmits the extension number configuration information to the Voice Processing System VPS The VPS then automatically creates the mailbox for each extension based on this information Conditions e Correct Mailbox No length must be selected in Panasonic Voice Mail System Reset Clear Menu to create proper Mailbox No based on three digit or four digit numbering plan e Automatic Configuration is available with one of the following KX TVS series VPSs KX TVS75 KX TVS100 KX TVS200 KX TVS80 110 200 1 200 2 KX TVS300 e When Automatic Configuration is executed the VPS will automatically create 64 KX TVS75 KX TVS100 or 1024 KX TVS200 KX TVS80 110 200 1 200 2 KX TVS300 mailboxes e PBX Type selection of the KX TVS series VPS When integrating the KX TD500 System with one of the KX TVS series VPSs please select TD500 in PBX Type menu of the VPS However if TD500 is not listed in the menu please select TD1232 instead e Automatic Configuration is available when the VPS is connected to a DLC or DHLC card whose L
297. tomatically selected for making a CO call Conditions e If the callback ringing is not answered in four rings within 10 seconds this feature is canceled e The extension user can cancel this feature by dialing the feature number for Automatic Callback Busy Cancel More than one extension user can set this function to one extension or CO line at the same time e FWD DND Override Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb feature does not work for the callback ringing It always rings the extension on which this feature was activated Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Automatic Callback Busy Cancel Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Automatic Route Selection ARS e Trunk Access User Manual References e 4 3 6 Automatic Callback Busy Camp On Features Guide 155 General Features Automatic Route Selection ARS Description Automatic Route Selection ARS is a system programmable feature that automatically selects the least expensive route available at the time an outgoing CO call is made ARS applies to an outgoing CO call made by dialing the feature number for Local CO Line Access ARS 9 default Pre programming eliminates the need of dialing the access code of the least expensive carrier The appropriate Trunk Group is selected and the carrier access code is added before the number is outpulsed System Programming Example Please refer to 7 ARS section in the Pr
298. ual References e 4 3 64 Pulse to Tone Conversion 282 Features Guide General Features Two Way Recording into the Voice Mail Description This is one of the DPT Integration features Allows the PT user to record the current telephone conversation into his own mailbox or another extension user s mailbox Note e During the recording of Two Way telephone conversations inform the other party that the conversation is being recorded Conditions e Two Way Record Two Way Transfer button These buttons can be assigned to a flexible CO DSS button by Station User or System Programming e If all voice mail ports are busy pressing the Two Way Record button does not function and an alarm tone sounds e If all voice mail ports are busy pressing the Two Way Transfer button followed by an extension number sends an alarm tone Programming Guide References e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Integration DPT User Manual References e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e 4 3 79 Two Way Recording into the Voice Mail 5 2 19 Two Way Record Button Assignment 5 2 20 Two Way Transfer Button Assignment Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports Digital Proprietary Telephone
299. unk Access Individual Trunk f Special Carrier Access g System Speed Dialing e Emergency Numbers The Emergency numbers such as Police or Fire Department should be stored in System Programming lt Section 5 4 Emergency Dial Code in the Programming Guide gt so that they are excepted from toll restriction e Ifa stored Host PBX access code or a stored carrier code is found in the dialed number a toll restriction check starts for the succeeding telephone number Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing This feature can be activated or deactivated per tenant e Checking Dial x by Toll Restriction It is determined by System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 7 Checking dial X by toll restriction in the Programming Guide gt whether the or dialed by an extension user is to be checked or not in Toll Restriction procedure This is useful to prevent unauthorized calls which could be possible through certain Central Offices exchange system Features Guide 189 General Features Programming Guide References e 2 2 Tenant System Speed Dial TRS Level Override 2 4 Class of Service COS TRS Level Day Night Call from TRS Level 7 Extension Transferring CO dial tone exempted from TRS e 2 5 System Timer First Digit Time Inter digit Time e 2 8 System Option Checking dial by toll restriction First Digit Time out Process e 3 2 Trunk Group PBX Access Cod
300. up Calls to a UCD group hunt for an idle extension in a circular way starting at the extension following the last one called UCD Group can be made up by assigning the group type of an Extension Group as UCD Up to 128 UCD Groups each consisting of more than one extension in the same tenant can be created in the system Incoming Group Calls to a UCD group hunt for an idle extension in the order assigned in the Incoming Group It is programmable whether to start at the extension following the last one called or to always start at the first assigned extension by System Programming lt Section 3 5 Incoming Group Search Mode in the Programming Guide gt UCD Group can be made up by assigning the group type of an Incoming Group as UCD Up to 96 UCD Groups can be created in the system Features Guide General Features 1 Outline sketch of UCD feature 1 When more than one call is in the UCD group the 1st call will arrive at extension A first Calls have arrived at a UCD group 3rd call in queue O 2nd call in queue O Ist call in queue O UCD group l Extension A i When extension A is busy or logged out the call arrives at extension B Extension B When extension B is busy or logged out the call arrives at extension C Extension C When extension C is busy or logged out the call arrives at extension A eee eee eee eee te Features Guide 139
301. up Phantom Extension or TAFAS outside calls only e Ifthe overflow destination or UCD Time Table is not programmed the call is put in the waiting queue Then if not answered within a specified period of time Intercept time the call will be transferred to the IRNA destination 4 UCD Time Table If all extensions in a UCD group are busy the incoming CO calls will be handled by the UCD Time Table procedure Up to 32 UCD Time Tables max 16 steps for each can be assigned by System Programming The following commands are provided to make up a UCD Time Table procedure Features Guide 145 General Features Command list and functions Command S 1 8 OGM 1 8 is sent to the caller if available If not wait until OGM 1 8 becomes available 1T 4T Callers are put in the waiting queue for N 1 4 x 8 seconds while hearing the ringback tone RET Returns to the first step of the sequence TR Transfers a call to the Overflow destination OFF Disconnects the call compulsorily Example of UCD Time Table Assignment UCD FDN OFDN TT 1 1091 1001 1 2 1092 1002 2 3 1093 4 1094 5 1095 6 1096 7 1097 8 1098 9 1099 UCD UCD Group Number FDN Floating Directory Number of the UCD Group OFDN _ Overflow Destination FDN TT Time Table Number 1 32 146 Features Guide General Features Procedure Assignment Example UCD Time Table
302. ure is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone dial tone 2 after going off hook depending on System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 15 Special dial tone after setting feature in the Programming Guide gt 256 Features Guide General Features e Assignable destination is FDN of Incoming Group or Extension Group If DIL 1 N is specified in Group Type setting of Incoming Group this feature does not work e Regarding the PT with the Group FWD button if Incoming Group FWD feature is assigned to the PT extension the Group FWD indicator lights in red e While setting you can temporarily cancel this feature by pressing the Group FWD button Pressing the Group FWD button alternates between setting and canceling the mode The lighting patterns of the Group FWD button are as follows Off This feature is not set Red on Group FWD mode e The Group FWD button cannot be used to store or cancel this feature Please use the feature number for Group FWD instead Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Group FWD e 2 4 Class of Service COS Incoming Group FWD e 2 8 System Option Special dial tone after setting feature e 4 3 Extension Line CO Key e 4 4 DSS Console DSS Key Features Guide References None User Manual References e 4 3 10 Call Forwarding All Calls to an Incoming Group e 2 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment e 3 2 5 005 Flexible
303. ures Microphone Mute Description Allows the PT user to turn off the microphone for privacy reasons Conditions e This is effective for the microphone only only your voice will be muted during a hands free conversation e The extension user in Microphone Mute mode can hear the other party s voice e This feature is available for the PT with AUTO ANSWER MUTE button only Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References 1 15 Proprietary Telephone Features e Handset Microphone Mute User Manual References e 4 3 39 Handset Microphone Mute e 4 3 47 Microphone Mute Features Guide 303 General Features Station Program Clear Description Allows the extension user to cancel the following functions assigned to his extension with a single operation a Absent Message Capability The message set on the extension b Automatic Callback Busy c Background Music that has been turned on d Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb DND e Call Log Incoming f Call Pickup Deny g Call Waiting BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA h Data Line Security Executive Busy Override Deny G Log out k Message Waiting All the messages that have been left by other extension users D Paging Deny m Paralleled Telephone enabled n Pickup Dialing The stored telephone number will be remov
304. used in DPT Integration Installation Manual References e 2 5 6 BRI Card KX TD50288 e 2 5 7 PRI23 Card KX TD50290 Programming Guide References e 1 8 BRI Port Assignment e 1 9 PRI Port Assignment e 2 8 System Option Destination Busy DID Illegal Number DID VM Trunk Service for DID e 3 2 Trunk Group Intercept Destination Day Night e 4 2 Trunk Line Incoming Type Destination Day Night Lunch Break DID TIE Digits to delete DID TIE Number to be added Digit to receive DID e 4 3 Extension Line Intercept Destination Day Night 9 2 DID Dial Registration DID MDN No Tenant No VPS Trunk Group No Features Guide References 2 1 ISDN Features e Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN User Manual References Not applicable 364 Features Guide ISDN Features Multiple Directory Number MDN Ringing Service Description Provides automatic direction of an incoming call from ISDN to a specific extension To realize this service the MDN number informed from ISDN telephone company is required The MDN number is converted to a DN or FDN of the destination by using a pre programmed conversion table Assignable destinations are 1 Regular extension with DN 2 Virtual extension with FDN Extension Group Incoming Group External Pager TAFAS Modem Remote Administration OGM Group DISA message Phantom Extension Call Fl
305. usy Override Deny Description Allows the extension user to prevent his extension from being interrupted by Executive Busy Override from another extension user Conditions e Class of Service COS programming COS programming lt Section 2 4 Class of Service COS Busy Override Deny in the Programming Guide gt determines the extension that can perform this feature e Distinctive Dial Tone When this feature is assigned to the extension the extension user may hear a distinctive dial tone dial tone 2 after going off hook depending on System Programming lt Section 2 8 System Option 15 Special dial tone after setting feature in the Programming Guide gt Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Executive Busy Override Deny Set Cancel e 2 4 Class of Service COS Busy Override Deny e 2 8 System Option Special dial tone after setting feature Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Executive Busy Override User Manual References e 4 3 33 Executive Busy Override e 4 3 34 Executive Busy Override Deny Features Guide 237 General Features Hands free Answerback Description Allows the PT with SP PHONE user to answer an intercom call and talk to the caller without lifting the handset When an intercom call comes in on an extension in Hands free Answerback mode the speakerphone is turned on automatically and hands free conversation is established immediately after the
306. utive Busy Override When the outside call made using a specific trunk is busy on another call the Manager or the Operators can join the existing outside call by dialing 2 after hearing a busy tone This feature is only available for the extension allowed by COS programming lt Section 2 4 Class of Service COS Busy Override in the Programming Guide gt Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Trunk Route Control 2 4 Class of Service COS Busy Override Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Executive Busy Override User Manual References 4 4 13 Trunk Route Control 110 Features Guide General Features Walking Station Description Used to move an extension to a new location without re programming Extension data such as extension number One Touch dialing memory remain the same after the re location of the extension Conditions e The telephone type PT SLT OPX must be the same at the source and destination e Walking Station is not available in the following cases If the extension is connected to a DHLC card KX TD50170 If the extension is connected to a HLC card KX T96170 in parallel If the extension is in hands free mode e The status of the port must be INS In Service at the source and destination e When the destination extension is in one of the following states ae shown on the display Off hook incoming call Call Hold Al
307. ve routes can be set up beforehand in addition to the primary route This permits TIE calls to be routed from A to B or A through C to B and so on If the primary route is poor because of equipment failure or congestion KX TD500 bypasses it and selects the secondary route On reception of a TIE call KX TD500 analyzes it to determine the destination to which the call must be sent or the route by which the calls will be sent and then transmit it Alternate Routing makes a TIE Line network more flexible in adapting to peaks of traffic and it provides a variety of different routing plans A Network of TIE Lines PBX 1 PBX 2 PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952 Ext 1000 Ext 2000 PBX Code 953 ZZZZZZA Primary route ME Secondary route Call Flow 1 Ext 1000 dials 77 952 2000 2 When 952 is found in the table TG10 Hunt Sequence 01 for 952 is selected automatically e IfTG10 is not available TG11 Hunt Sequence 02 will be selected In this case the call is sent to PBX 2 via PBX 3 and 4 The treatment of the call is decided by Routing Table of PBX 3 and then PBX 4 3 The call is sent to PBX 2 Features Guide 379 TIE Line Features 380 Programming example To realize the call flow mentioned above the following System Programming is required at PBX 1 3 and 4 respectively PBX 1 8 2 TIE Routing Table PBX Code 951
308. verflow Setting Destination Day Night Overflow Setting Timer Group Type FWD DND Mode Extension Call Hunting Calls to Empty Group UCD Setting Time Table No UCD Setting FWD No Answer UCD Setting Auto LOGOUT Mode UCD Setting Supervisor Extension UCD Setting LOGIN Monitor UCD Setting UCD Call Waiting Operator Setting Call Priority Operator Setting Ringing Type e 4 3 Extension Line Group No e 4 7 ISDN Extension Line Group No Features Guide References 30 1 3 System Features e Floating Station e Integration Automated Attendant AA Service e Integration Voice Mail VM Service e Operator Group 1 5 Attended Features e Ring Group e Uniform Call Distribution UCD 1 8 Ringing Features e Log In Log Out e Station Hunting 1 9 Answering Features e Call Pickup Features Guide General Features User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 31 General Features External Modem Control Description The system supports an external modem Please refer to Notes plugged into the RS 232C Port 1 The system communicates with the remote terminal at data rate of up to 19 200 bps and enables remote system maintenance through an external modem A pre assigned AT Command see Notes can be sent to an external modem automatically when it is plugged into the RS 232C Port 1 The extension user is also allowed to control the external mo
309. warding 251 Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb 333 Call Forwarding All Calls to an Incoming Group 256 Call Hold 245 Call Log Incoming 334 Call Log Outgoing 337 Call Park 247 Call Pickup 230 Call Splitting 248 Call Transfer 258 Call Waiting 233 Call Waiting from Central Office 236 Caller ID Service 117 Caller ID Service on T1 Line 119 Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP 356 Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR 358 Calling Name Identification Presentation CNIP 360 Calling Name Identification Restriction CNIR 361 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection 22 Class of Service COS 24 Conference 3 Party 266 394 Conference 5 Party 268 Conference Unattended 270 Confirmation Tones 284 Consultation Hold 249 Conversation Features 266 D Data Line Security 272 Dial Tones Distinctive 286 Dial Type Selection 26 Dialing Features 202 DIL 1 N Group 27 Direct In Lines DIL 121 Direct Inward Dialing DID 124 362 Direct Inward System Access DISA 128 Display Contrast Adjustment 338 Display Features 327 Display Call Information 339 Display Date and Time 341 Display Self Extension Number 342 Do Not Disturb DND 216 Do Not Disturb DND Override 165 Door Opener 28 Doorphone Call 273 DSS Console 298 E Electronic Station Lockout 166 Emergency Call 167 End to End DTMF Signaling Tone Through 274 Executive Busy Override 168 Executive Busy Override Deny 237 Ex
310. wer calls Login 140 Features Guide General Features Features Guide Group Login Logout When a single extension belongs to multiple different Incoming Groups at a time Group Login Logout setting works on the Incoming Group basis UCD Supervisory Features Login Monitor lt For Extension Group members gt Login Logout status of the UCD Group members can be monitored through Busy Lamp Field of the corresponding DSS button Login Monitor is enabled or disabled by System Programming lt Section 3 3 Extension Group LOGIN Monitor in the Programming Guide gt lt For Incoming Group members gt Login Logout status of the UCD Group members can be monitored by the extension specified as the Supervisor Extension through Busy Lamp Field of the corresponding DSS button UCD Monitor Mode The extension specified as the Supervisor Extension can monitor the number of calls put in the waiting queue by dialing the feature number for UCD Monitor Mode To start UCD monitor dial feature number UCD Group FDN To end UCD monitor dial feature number x You can also use the Features menu of a large display DPT The extension that can perform this feature is determined by System Programming lt Section 3 3 Extension Group 3 5 Incoming Group Supervisor Extension in the Programming Guide gt What if a call ringing on a member extension is not answered If not answered within a specified period of time Call Forwarding
311. works as follows so that both party A and party B do not know that their conversation is being monitored by Party C The display and LED indicator at party A and party B show the status of a 2 party conversation A confirmation tone is not sent to either party A or party B even if it is enabled by System Programming The speech path from the party C to the party A and party B is not connected If either one of two extensions or both of them is released from the call to perform other operations such as making a call or placing it on hold this feature is terminated and then a reorder tone is sent to the calling extension Programming Guide References 2 3 Numbering Plan Data Line Security Set Cancel Executive Busy Override Deny Set Cancel 2 4 Class of Service COS Busy Override Busy Override Deny Secret Busy Override 2 8 System Option Confirmation tone for Override Barge in Conference and Privacy Release Features Guide References 1 9 Answering Features e Executive Busy Override Deny 1 12 Conversation Features e Data Line Security Features Guide 181 General Features User Manual References e 4 3 69 Secret Busy Override 182 Features Guide General Features Toll Restriction Description Toll Restriction is a system programmable feature that in conjunction with the assigned Class of Service can prohibit certain extension users from placing unauthorized toll
312. xempted from TRS Enable Disable TRS Toll Restriction Level Day Night 1 8 Trunk Group Setting Day Night Trunk Group 01 48 24 Features Guide General Features Conditions e Walking COS The extension user can make a toll call at other lower level COS extensions toll outward restricted by employing his own higher level COS temporarily e Switching COS Two different levels of COS Primary COS and Secondary COS are assigned to all extensions However either one of them is valid at a time The Manager and the Operators can change the COS level of any extension including their own Programming Guide References e 2 4 Class of Service COS e 4 3 Extension Line COS No Primary COS No Secondary e 4 7 ISDN Extension Line COS No Primary COS No Secondary Features Guide References 1 6 Originating Features e Walking COS User Manual References e 4 3 84 Walking COS e 4 4 10 Switching COS Features Guide 25 General Features Dial Type Selection Description Used to select the desired dialing mode for each CO line regardless of originating call extension rotary or tone There are two dialing modes available DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency Mode The dialing signal from an extension either tone or rotary is converted to tone dialing DTME signals are transmitted to the CO line Pulse Dial Rotary Mode The dialing signal from an extension either t
313. xtension whose TRS level is assigned as 2 through 6 by System Programming Not applied to the extension with TRS level 1 Up to 1000 account codes per system tenant can be programmed for Verified Account code operation These are used for Toll Restriction Override Features Guide General Features e If the extension user does not enter any account code or enters an invalid account code an ordinary toll restriction check is done Programming Guide References e 2 3 Numbering Plan Account Code e 2 4 Class of Service COS Account Code Mode e 5 6 Account Code Tenant No Entry No Code TRS Level Features Guide References 1 3 System Features e Account Code Entry 1 6 Originating Features e Toll Restriction User Manual References e 4 3 2 Account Code Entry e 4 3 76 Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry Features Guide 193 General Features Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing Description Allows the extension user to override Toll Restriction in System Speed Dialing Normally calls originated by System Speed Dialing are restricted depending on the extension s toll restriction level Once this feature is activated it permits all extension users to make System Speed Dialing calls without restriction Conditions e Tenant Service This feature can be activated or deactivated on a tenant basis by System Programming Programming Guide References e 2 2 Tenant
314. y KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7433 KX T7436 When an incoming CO call with Caller ID information directed to an extension is not answered Caller ID information is automatically recorded in the Call Log of the called extension This information can be used for confirming the caller and callback purposes Automatic Recording If an incoming CO call directed to a single extension was not answered the caller s information is automatically recorded in the Call Log of the called extension just after the call ringing has stopped Manual Recordin The extension user can record the caller s information manually during or after the call until the next caller information is displayed Up to 30 Call Records can be logged in the Call Log either automatically or manually per display DPT extension Display example Caller s information is displayed as follows 10101 AB COMPANY Trunk Port Physical Number Name 0102030405 Caller ID Number BOB HANKS Caller ID Name OCT30 09 00PM Date Time SEQ01 02CALL Sequence Number 01 30 MENU CLR NEXT Number of Times Called 30 times max Callback The extension user can call back the outside caller by choosing the appropriate Call Records in the Call Log Conditions 334 e Calls to multiple DPTs DIL 1 N Ring Group Phantom extensions If a call rang at more than one extension simultaneously but was not answered the caller s information is recorded in the Call Log of the DPT wi
315. y User or System Programming Summer Time The start and end dates of the summer time can be programmed by System Programming The system clock will be adjusted one hour forward or backward at 2 00 a m of the programmed date if enabled It means 2 00 a m will become 3 00 a m on the start date of the summer time and 2 00 a m will become 1 00 a m on the end date If Timed Reminder or Day Night Switching Mode feature is set between 1 00 a m and 3 00 a m it may not work properly Programming Guide References e 2 8 System Option LCD Time Display Mode Date Display e 10 7 System Time Features Guide References None User Manual References e 3 2 1 000 Date and Time Set Features Guide 341 General Features Display Self Extension Number Description Allows the display PT user to display their own extension port physical number and extension number in Station Programming mode Display example extension port physical number extension number 10101 lt gt EXT1021 L Port number 01 16 Slot number 01 14 Shelf number 1 3 Conditions None Programming Guide References System Programming is not required Features Guide References None User Manual References 2 2 15 Self Extension Number Confirmation 342 Features Guide General Features Message Waiting Description The system supports the ability to inform the called party of a messa
316. y call and vice versa These are caused by Executive Busy Override Barge in 3 party conference call or Privacy Release It is possible to eliminate this tone by System Programming dls Conditions e Confirmation Tone 1 and 2 are provided to reconfirm the assigned feature Programming Guide References e 2 2 Tenant External Paging Tone Confirmation Tone for Station or External Paging e 2 8 System Option Confirmation tone for Override Barge in Conference and Privacy Release Confirmation tone for Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Answer Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve Features Guide References None User Manual References Not applicable Features Guide 285 General Features Dial Tones Distinctive Description 286 The following four types of dial tone patterns are provided to give information about features activated on the extension Dial tone 1 Normal dial tone None of the features listed below are activated ls i Dial tone 2 Emitted when any one or more of the features below are set Absent Message Capability Background Music BGM Call Forwarding Call Pickup Deny Call Waiting Data Line Security Do Not Disturb DND Electronic Station Lockout SANA Wu BR WN Executive Busy Override Deny 10 Paging Deny 11 Pickup Dialing 12 Timed Reminder ls Dial tone 3 Emitted when performing Account Code Entry or DISA Us

KX-TD500 Feature Guide V4M

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents